Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual Digital Camera Model No. DC-GH6 Please read these instructions carefully before using this product. Register online at http://shop.panasonic.com/support (U.S. customers only) A firmware update has been made available to improve camera capabilities and to add functionality. • For information about functions that have been added or modified, refer to the pages for “Firmware Update”.
About Operating Instructions This document, “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual ”, includes detailed explanations of all the functions and operations of the camera. Symbols Used in This Document Black icons show conditions in which functions can be used, and gray icons show conditions in which functions cannot be used.
About Operating Instructions (A) : Front dial (B) : Rear dial (C) 3421: Cursor button up/down/left/right or Joystick up/down/left/right (D) : Press the center of the joystick (E) : [MENU/SET] button (F) : Control dial • Other symbols, such as icons shown on the camera screen, are also used in explanations. • This document describes the procedure for selecting menu items as follows: Example) Set [Picture Quality] of the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu to [STD.].
About Operating Instructions Notification classification symbols In this document, notifications are classified and described using the following symbols: : To confirm prior to using the function : Hints for better use of the camera and tips for recording : Notifications and supplementary items regarding specifications : Related functions and information • Images and illustrations used in this document are for explaining the functions.
Contents About Operating Instructions 2 Introduction 17 Before Use.................................................................................18 Standard Accessories................................................................21 Lenses That Can Be Used.........................................................23 Memory Cards That Can Be Used.............................................24 Names of Parts ..........................................................................27 Camera.............
Contents Basic Operations 76 How to Hold the Camera ...........................................................77 Selecting the Recording Mode...................................................79 Camera Setting Operations .......................................................80 Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings ..........................................87 Setting the Viewfinder ....................................................................... 87 Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder .....
Contents [Rec Quality] ............................................................................136 [Image Area of Video] ..............................................................150 Focus / Zoom 152 Selecting the Focus Mode .......................................................153 Using AF ..................................................................................155 [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ............................................................ 160 [Focus Limiter] .............
Contents High Resolution mode .............................................................220 Recording with Time Lapse Shot.............................................225 Recording with Stop Motion Animation....................................232 Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos ....................236 Recording Using the Self-timer................................................238 Bracket Recording ...................................................................242 [Silent Mode]........
Contents [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]................................................................... 298 White Balance / Image Quality 299 White Balance (WB) ................................................................300 Adjusting the White Balance ........................................................... 305 [Photo Style] ............................................................................307 [Filter Settings].........................................................................
Contents [Luminance Level] ........................................................................... 358 [Master Pedestal Level]................................................................... 359 Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)......................... 360 [ISO Sensitivity (video)] ................................................................... 362 [Dynamic Range Boost]................................................................... 363 Audio Settings..........................
Contents [Flicker Decrease (Video)] ............................................................... 399 [SS/Gain Operation] ........................................................................ 400 [WFM/Vector Scope] ....................................................................... 402 [Luminance Spot Meter] .................................................................. 406 [Zebra Pattern] ................................................................................ 408 [Frame Marker] .....
Contents Settings for Down-Converting.......................................................... 465 HDMI Output Settings..............................................................470 Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI..................... 471 Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder ................. 472 Outputting Audio via HDMI.............................................................. 473 Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI..................
Contents Register Functions to the Fn Buttons .............................................. 520 Use the Fn Buttons.......................................................................... 531 [Dial Operation Switch] ............................................................532 Register Functions to the Dials........................................................ 532 Temporarily Change Dial Operation ................................................ 534 Quick Menu Customization........................
Contents [Video] menu............................................................................614 [Custom] menu ........................................................................617 [Setup] menu ...........................................................................620 [My Menu] ................................................................................622 [Playback] menu ......................................................................
Contents Image Send Settings ....................................................................... 675 Selecting Images ............................................................................. 676 [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ..................................................................677 Connecting to Other Devices 679 Connecting...............................................................................680 Viewing on a TV.......................................................................
Contents Video ............................................................................................... 738 Playback .......................................................................................... 739 Monitor/Viewfinder........................................................................... 740 Flash................................................................................................ 741 Wi-Fi Function .........................................................................
Introduction This chapter describes information you should know before starting.
Introduction – Before Use Before Use Firmware of Your Camera/Lens Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add functionality. Make sure that the firmware of the camera/lens you purchased is the latest version. We recommend using the latest firmware version. • To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera and select [Firmware Version] in the [Setup] ([Others]) menu. You can also update the firmware in [Firmware Version].
Introduction – Before Use Splash Resistant Splash Resistant is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this camera offers against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust. Splash Resistant does not guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is subjected to direct contact with water.
Introduction – Before Use Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for other than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder. Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the purpose of personal enjoyment.
Introduction – Standard Accessories Standard Accessories Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera. • The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased. For details on the accessories, refer to “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual ” (supplied). ≥Digital camera body (This is referred to as camera in this document.) ≥Battery pack (This is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.
Introduction – Standard Accessories Items Supplied with DC-GH6L (Lens Kit Product) ≥Interchangeable lens: H-ES12060 “LEICA DG VARIO-ELMARIT 12-60mm/F2.8-4.0 ASPH./POWER O.I.S.” • Dust and splash resistant • The recommended operating temperature is from −10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF) ≥Lens hood ≥Lens cap*2 ≥Lens rear cap*2 Items Supplied with DC-GH6M (Lens Kit Product) ≥Interchangeable lens: H-FS12060 “LUMIX G VARIO 12-60mm/F3.5-5.6 ASPH./POWER O.I.S.
Introduction – Lenses That Can Be Used Lenses That Can Be Used The camera can use the dedicated lenses that comply with the Micro Four Thirds™ system lens mount specification (Micro Four Thirds mount). You can also use the Leica M Mount interchangeable lens by attaching the M Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA2M: optional). About the Lens and Functions Depending on the lens used, certain functions, such as focus, image stabilizer, and zoom functions, may be disabled or operate differently.
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used Memory Cards That Can Be Used You can use CFexpress cards and SD memory cards with this camera. The memory cards that can be used are described below (As of January 2022). • SD memory card, SDHC memory card, and SDXC memory card are referred to by the generic name of SD card in this document. • When not differentiating between a CFexpress card and SD card, a card is referred to as simply card.
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used SD Cards That Can Be Used with This Camera When using the following functions, use cards that have the correct SD Speed Class, UHS Speed Class, and Video Speed Class. • Speed classes are for SD card standards to guarantee the minimum speed necessary for continuous writing.
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used • You can prevent the writing and deleting of data by setting the write-protect switch (A) on the SD card to “LOCK”. (A) • The data stored on a card may be damaged due to electromagnetic waves, static electricity or a failure of the camera or card. We recommend backing up important data. • Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Introduction – Names of Parts Names of Parts ≥ Camera: 27 ≥ Supplied Lens: 35 ≥ Viewfinder/Monitor Displays: 37 Camera (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (1) (2) (3) (4) 27
Introduction – Names of Parts (1) Stereo microphone (ÎAudio Settings: 364) • Do not block the microphone with a finger. Audio will be difficult to record. (2) Drive mode dial (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 210) (3) Hot shoe (hot shoe cover) (ÎRemoving the Hot Shoe Cover: 325) • Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Introduction – Names of Parts (18) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (19) (28) (29) (17) (27) (30) (31) (17) [ ] (Playback) button (ÎPlaying Back and Editing of Images: 474) (18) Operation lock lever (ÎOperation Lock Lever: 86) (19) Monitor (ÎViewfinder/Monitor Displays: 37, Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 707)/ Touch screen (ÎTouch Screen: 84) (20) [ ] (AF mode) button (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 167) (21) Focus mode lever (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 153, Using AF: 155, Record Using MF: 195) (22) Rea
Introduction – Names of Parts (26) [Q] (Quick menu) button (ÎQuick Menu: 94) (27) Cursor buttons (ÎCursor Buttons: 82)/ Fn buttons (ÎFn Buttons: 517) 3: Fn14, 1: Fn15, 4: Fn16, 2: Fn17 (28) Control dial (ÎControl Dial: 81) (29) [MENU/SET] button (Î[MENU/SET] Button: 82, Menu Operation Methods: 99) (30) [DISP.
Introduction – Names of Parts (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37) (40) (38) (41) (42) (45) (46) (47) (48) (39) (43) (44) (49) (32) Diopter adjustment dial (ÎAdjusting the Viewfinder Diopter: 87) (33) Eye cup (ÎCleaning the Viewfinder: 752) • Keep the eye cup out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Introduction – Names of Parts (40) [REMOTE] socket (ÎShutter Remote Control (Optional): 703) (41) Card access light 1 (ÎCard Access Indications: 62) (42) Card slot 1 (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 60) (43) Card slot 2 (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 60) (44) Card access light 2 (ÎCard Access Indications: 62) (45) Card door lock lever (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 60) (46) Card door (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 60) (47) Battery door release lever (ÎBattery Insertion: 47) (48) Battery door (ÎBattery Insertion:
Introduction – Names of Parts (56) (57) (50) (51) (52) (58) (53) (59) (54) (60) (61) (55) (62) (63) (64)(65) (66)(67) (68) (69) (70) (50) (50) Shoulder strap eyelet (ÎAttaching a Shoulder Strap: 40) (51) Shutter button (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 118) (52) Self-timer light (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 238)/ AF assist light (Î[AF Assist Light]: 165) (53) Enlarged live display (video) button (Î[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 356)/ Fn button (Fn2) (ÎFn Buttons: 517) (54) Grip (55) Preview button (
Introduction – Names of Parts (58) [MIC] socket (ÎExternal Microphones (Optional): 374) (59) Headphone socket (ÎHeadphones: 382) • Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. (60) USB port (ÎInserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 49, USB port: 681) (61) Cable holder mount (ÎAttaching the Cable Holder: 459) (62) HDMI socket (ÎConnecting HDMI Devices: 458, HDMI socket: 680) (63) Fan outlet (Î[Fan Mode]: 580) • The fan outlet for the cooling fan.
Introduction – Names of Parts Supplied Lens H-ES12060 (1) (2) (3) (4)(5) (6) (7) (8) H-FS12060 (1) (2) (3) (6) 35 (7) (8)
Introduction – Names of Parts (1) Lens surface (2) Focus ring (ÎRecord Using MF: 195) (3) Zoom ring (ÎRecording with Zoom: 204) (4) O.I.S. switch (ÎImage Stabilizer: 259) (5) [AF/MF] switch (ÎUsing AF: 155, Record Using MF: 195) • You can switch between AF and MF. If [MF] is set on either the lens or camera, operation will be with MF.
Introduction – Names of Parts Viewfinder/Monitor Displays At the time of purchase, the viewfinder/monitor displays the following icons. • For information about the icons other than those described here (ÎMonitor/ Viewfinder Displays: 707) Viewfinder (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) FINE L 60 F2.8 ISO100 (8) (9)(10)(11)(12) (7) AFS (13) 999 (14) (15) (16)(17) Monitor FINE L 60 F2.
Introduction – Names of Parts (1) Photo Style (Î[Photo Style]: 307) (2) Level gauge (Î[Level Gauge]: 573) (3) Picture quality (Î[Picture Quality]: 123)/ Picture size (Î[Picture Size]: 121) (4) AF area (ÎAF Area Movement Operation: 187) (5) Focus mode (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 153, Using AF: 155, Record Using MF: 195) (6) AF mode (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 167) (7) Image stabilizer (ÎImage Stabilizer: 259) (8) Focus (green) (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 118, Using AF: 155)/ Recording state (red) (ÎBasic Video
Getting Started Before recording, read this chapter to prepare the camera.
Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap Attaching a Shoulder Strap Attach a shoulder strap to the camera with the following procedure to prevent it from dropping.
Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap 4 • Pull the shoulder strap and check that it will not come out. • Attach the opposite end of the shoulder strap with the same procedure. • Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder. – Do not wrap the strap around your neck. It may result in injury or accident. • Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it. – It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery Charging the Battery ≥ Charging with the Charger: 44 ≥ Battery Insertion: 47 ≥ Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 49 ≥ Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power/ Charging): 53 ≥ Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply: 55 ≥ [Power Save Mode]: 57 You can charge the battery either using the supplied charger, or in the camera body. You can also turn on the camera and supply power from an electrical outlet.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery Optional battery DMW-BLF19 You can also use DMW-BLF19 (optional), but there are the following limitations: • The following functions cannot be used: – [Rec Quality] exceeding a resolution of C4K – [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of 60.00p – [Variable Frame Rate] exceeding a frame rate of 60 fps • The battery capacity is low, so this reduces the number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery Charging with the Charger Charging time: Approx. 230 min • Use the supplied charger and AC adaptor. • The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely. The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used. The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been used for a long time may be longer than normal. • Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery 3 Insert the battery. ≥The charging lights ([CHARGE]) (A) blink and charging begins. • Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. This may cause malfunction. • Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one. This may cause malfunction.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery Charging Lights Indications Charging status 0 % to 49 % 50 % to 79 % 80 % to 99 % 100 % (C) (B) (D) Charging lights (B) (C) (B) (B) Blinking (C) On (D) Off • When the battery is inserted while the charger is not connected to the power source, the charging lights turn on for a certain period to allow you to confirm the battery level. • After charging, disconnect the power source connection and remove the battery.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery Battery Insertion • Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLK22). – You can also use DMW-BLF19 (optional), but there are limitations. (ÎOptional battery DMW-BLF19: 43) • If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product. • Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF]. 1 2 (E) • Check that the lever (E) is holding the battery in place.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery 3 Removing the Battery 1 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]. 2 Open the battery door. 3 Push the lever (E) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the battery. • Check that the card access lights are off before removing the battery. (ÎCard Access Indications: 62) (E) • Ensure that no foreign objects are adhering to the inner side (rubber seal) of the battery door. • Remove the battery after use.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging Charging time: Approx. 220 min • Using the camera body and the supplied AC adaptor. • The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely. The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used. The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery 1 (F) 3 4 2 1 2 3 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]. Insert the battery into the camera. Connect the camera USB port and the AC adaptor using the USB connection cable. • Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug. 4 (Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction) Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet. • The charging light (F) turns red and charging begins.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery • You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and the camera with the USB connection cable. In that case, charging may take a while. • Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. This may cause malfunction. • Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one. This may cause malfunction. • After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery Power Supply When the battery is inserted into the camera for charging and the camera is turned on, you can record while the camera is being supplied with power. • [ ] is displayed in the screen while power is being supplied. • You can also supply power by using a USB connection cable to connect the camera and a USB device (PC, etc.). • The battery cannot be charged while power is being supplied.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power/Charging) Since this camera and the items supplied with the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional) are compatible with USB PD (USB Power Delivery), you can charge while the camera is being supplied with power. Connect the USB connection cable, AC adaptor and AC cable/AC mains lead of the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional) to the camera. Charging time: Approx.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery • Insert the battery into the camera. • Connect using the USB connection cable of the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional). • When the camera is on, charging will take longer than when the camera is off. • Even when connecting with devices that support USB PD, you may not be able to charge while using the camera. • If connecting with devices (PC, etc.) that do not support USB PD and turning the camera on, then this will supply power only.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply Power Indications Indication on monitor (J) (K) (J) USB connection cable supplying power (K) Battery indication 80 % or higher 60 % to 79 % 40 % to 59 % 20 % to 39 % 19 % or below Low battery (The power indicator also blinks) Blinking in red • Charge or replace the battery. • The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate. The exact level varies depending on the environment and the operating conditions.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery • We recommend that genuine Panasonic batteries are used. There is a possibility that the use of non-genuine batteries can cause accidents or malfunctions that may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure resulting from the use of non-genuine batteries. • Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery [Power Save Mode] This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a set time. Reduces battery consumption.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery [Sleep Mode] Sets the amount of time until the camera is put to sleep. [Sleep Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being disconnected Mode(Wi-Fi)] from Wi-Fi. [Auto LVF/ Monitor Off] Sets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor to turn off. (The camera is not turned off.) Puts the camera to sleep when the recording screen is being displayed on the monitor when automatic viewfinder/monitor switching is active.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery • [Power Save Mode] is not available in the following cases: – While connected to a PC or printer – During video recording/video playback – During a [Time Lapse Shot] – When recording with [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set) – When recording with [Focus Transition] – During a [Slide Show] – During HDMI output for recording 59
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional) Inserting Cards (Optional) • Format the cards with the camera before use. (Î[Card Format]: 586) This camera supports the double card slot function. When two cards are used, relay recording, backup recording, and allocation recording are available.
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional) 3 (A) Card slot 1: CFexpress card (B) Card slot 2: SD card • Match the orientation of the cards as shown in the figure and then insert them firmly until they click.
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional) Card Access Indications The card access light turns on while the card is being accessed. (C) (D) (C) Card access light for card slot 1 (D) Card access light for card slot 2 • Do not perform the following operations during access. The camera may operate incorrectly or the card and recorded images may be damaged. – Turn off the camera. – Remove the battery or card or disconnect the power plug. – Subject the camera to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional) Removing a Card 1 Open the card door. 2 Push the card until it clicks and then pull the card out straight. • Check that the card access lights are off before removing the card. CAUTION, HOT CARD • As indicated on the inside of the card door, the card may be hot just after the camera has been used. Be careful when removing.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens Attaching a Lens ≥ Attaching a Lens Hood: 67 The camera can use the dedicated lenses that comply with the Micro Four Thirds™ system lens mount specification (Micro Four Thirds mount). For information about the lens that can be used (ÎLenses That Can Be Used: 23) • Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF]. • Change the lens in a location where there is not a lot of dirt and dust.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens 3 (A) (A) Lens fitting marks Removing a Lens • While pressing the lens release button (B), rotate the lens in the direction of the arrow until it stops and then remove it.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens • When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function with this camera, after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens information is displayed. You can register the focal length for the lens when you select [Yes]. (Î[Lens Information]: 266) • You can change the settings so that the confirmation message is not displayed: (Î[Lens Info. Confirmation]: 584) • Insert the lens straight in.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens Attaching a Lens Hood For recording against strong backlight, a lens hood can reduce the inclusion of unwanted light in images and drop in contrast resulting from the irregular reflection of light that occurs within the lens. It allows you take more beautiful pictures by cutting out excess light. When attaching the lens hood (flower shape) supplied with the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060/H-FS12060) • Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as shown in the figure.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens 1 Align mark (C) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens. (C) 2 Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to align mark (D) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens. ≥Attach the lens hood by rotating it until it clicks.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens Removing the Lens Hood (H-ES12060) While pressing the lens hood button (E), rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow and then remove it. (E) • The lens hood can be attached in the reverse direction when carrying the camera. Example) H-ES12060 1 Align mark (D) ( 2 Attach the lens hood by rotating it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks. ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.
Getting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle The monitor on this camera has angling and tilting that you can adjust in combinations to freely change the orientation and angle. At the time of purchase, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.
Getting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle Tilt Put your finger on (A) and push the monitor up in the direction of the arrow. (A) 28° 50° • The monitor of this camera can be tilted in two stages. • The monitor can still be opened when tilted to 28°. • The angles of adjustment are guides only. • Take care not to trap a finger in the monitor. • Do not apply an excessive force to the monitor. This may cause damage or malfunction.
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time) Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time) When you turn the camera on for the first time, a screen to set the time zone and clock appears. Be sure to set these settings before use to ensure images are recorded with the correct date and time information. 1 Set the camera on/off switch to [ON]. ≥The power indicator lights. ≥If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed to Step .
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time) 5 Set the time zone. ≥Press 21 to select the time zone and then press • If you are using Daylight Savings [ or . ], press 3. (The time will move forward by 1 hour.) To return to the normal time, press 3 again. (A) 6 (A) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) When [Please set the clock] appears, press 73 or .
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time) 7 Set the clock. 21: Select an item (year, month, day, hour, minute, or second). 34: Select a value. To set the display order and time display format ≥To display the screen for setting the display order (B) and time display format (C), select [Style] by pressing 21 and then press or .
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time) 8 9 Confirm your selection. ≥Press or . When [The clock setting has been completed.] appears, press or . • If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to “0:00:00 1/1/2022”. • Clock settings are maintained for approx. 3 months using the built-in clock battery even without the battery. (Leave the fully-charged battery in the camera for approx. 24 hours to charge the built-in battery.
Basic Operations This chapter describes basic camera operations and the Intelligent Auto mode which helps you start recording immediately.
Basic Operations – How to Hold the Camera How to Hold the Camera To minimize camera shake, hold the camera so that it will not move during recording. Hold the camera with both hands, keep your arms still at your side, and stand with your feet shoulder width apart. ≥ Hold the camera firmly by wrapping your right hand around the camera grip. ≥ Support the lens from below with your left hand. • Do not cover the AF assist light (A) or microphone (B) with your fingers or other objects.
Basic Operations – How to Hold the Camera Vertical Orientation Detection Function This function detects when pictures were recorded with the camera held vertically orientated. With the default settings, pictures are automatically played back vertically oriented. • If you set [Rotate Disp.] to [OFF], pictures will be played back without being rotated. (Î[Rotate Disp.]: 507) • When the camera is tilted significantly up or down, the vertical orientation detection function may not work correctly.
Basic Operations – Selecting the Recording Mode Selecting the Recording Mode 1 Press the mode dial lock button (1) to release the lock. 2 Rotate the mode dial (2) and adjust the recording mode. • The dial is locked if the mode dial lock button is depressed. Each press locks/unlocks the dial.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations Camera Setting Operations When changing the camera settings, operate the camera using the following operation parts. To prevent accidental operation, you can disable operation with the operation lock lever.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations Front Dial/Rear Dial Rotate: Selects an item or numeric value. Control Dial Rotate: Selects an item or numeric value.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations Cursor Buttons Press: Selects an item or numeric value. [MENU/SET] Button Press: Confirms a setting. • Displays the menu during recording and playback.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations Joystick The joystick can be operated in 8 directions by tilting it up, down, left, right and diagonally and by pressing the center part. (I) Tilt: Selects an item or numeric value, or moves a position. • Place your finger on the center of the joystick before tilting. The joystick may not work as expected when the sides are pressed. (J) Press: Confirms a setting.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations Touch Screen Operations can be performed by touching the icons, slide bars, menus, and other items displayed on the screen. Touch Operation of touching and then lifting your finger from the touch screen. Drag Operation of moving a finger while it touches the touch screen.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations Pinch (widen/narrow) Operations of widening the distance between two fingers (pinch out) and narrowing the distance between two fingers (pinch in) while they are touching the touch screen. • If you will use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, observe the precautions for the sheet. (Visibility and operability may be impaired depending on the type of monitor protection sheet.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations Operation Lock Lever Aligning the operation lock lever with the [LOCK] position enables disabling of the operation parts set in [Lock Lever Setting] of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings ≥ Setting the Viewfinder: 87 ≥ Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 88 ≥ Switching the Display Information: 91 Setting the Viewfinder Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter Rotate the diopter adjustment dial while looking through the viewfinder. • Adjust until you can clearly see the text on the viewfinder.
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder With the default settings, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching is set. When you look through the viewfinder, the eye sensor (A) works and the camera switches from monitor display to viewfinder display. You can switch to viewfinder display or monitor display with [LVF] button (B). Press [LVF].
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings Simultaneous Display on the Monitor and Viewfinder When automatic viewfinder/monitor switching (C), if the monitor is rotated towards the lens, the recording screen seen when looking through the viewfinder is also displayed on the monitor.
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings • The eye sensor does not work while the monitor is tilted. • The eye sensor may not work correctly due to the shape of eyeglasses, the way the camera is held, or bright light shining around the eyepiece. • During video playback or slide show, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching does not work.
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings Switching the Display Information Press [DISP.]. ≥ The display information is switched.
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings Viewfinder (J) FINE L (K) AFS ISO AUTO 999 (J) With information (K) Without information • Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge. This can also be set by using [Level Gauge].
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings Playback Screen (M) 1 (L) 2022.12.1 10:00 100-0001 AFS 4:3 L ISO 60 100 0 STD. (N) (O) 2 1/5 FINE sRGB AWB F2.8 2022.12. 1 10:00 F2.8 ±0 ISO100 FINE L 100-0001 (L) With information (M) Detailed information display (N) Without information (O) Without blinking highlights *1 Pressing 34 switches the display information.
Basic Operations – Quick Menu Quick Menu This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used during recording without calling up the menu screen. You can also change the Quick menu display method and the items to display. 1 Display the Quick menu. 2 Select a menu item. ≥Press [Q]. ≥Press 3421. ≥Directions on the diagonal can also be selected using the joystick. ≥Selection is also possible by rotating . ≥Selection is also possible by touching a menu item.
Basic Operations – Quick Menu 3 Select a setting item. ≥Rotate or . ≥Selection is also possible by touching a setting item. ISO AWB AUTO 0 0 0 0 0 0 4:3 4 Close the Quick menu. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. ≥You can also close the menu by pressing [Q]. • Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
Basic Operations – Control Panel Control Panel This screen allows you to view the current recording settings on the monitor. You can also touch the screen to change the settings. In the [ ] mode (Creative Video mode), the display changes to one especially for video. • For information about the screen (ÎControl Panel: 715, Control Panel (Creative Video Mode): 718) 1 Display the control panel. ≥Press [DISP.] several times. ISO AUTO AFS 0 0 0 4:3 FINE AWB 2 OFF Fn 999 999 Touch the items.
Basic Operations – Control Panel 3 Change the setting. Example) Changing the AF mode ≥Touch the setting item. • Refer to the pages explaining each item for information on how to change the settings. 4 Touch [Set].
Basic Operations – Control Panel Changing Directly Using the Dial Steps 2 to 4 can also be changed using the following operations. 1 Press one of 3421 to enable selection of items. 2 Press 3421 to select an item. 3 Rotate • Selected items are displayed in yellow. • Selection is also possible by rotating or . to change the settings values. ISO AUTO AFS 0 0 4:3 FINE AWB ISO AUTO AFS 0 0 4:3 FINE AWB • Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods Menu Operation Methods ≥ [Reset]: 104 In this camera, the menu is used for setting a wide variety of functions and performing camera customizations. Menu operations can be performed using the cursors, joystick, dial, or by touch. Configuration and operation parts of the menu The menu can be operated by pressing 21 to move between menu screens.
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods 1 Display the menu. 2 Select a main tab. ≥Press . ≥Press 34 to select a main tab and then press 1. ≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating the main tab and then pressing or .
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods 3 Select a sub tab. ≥Press 34 to select a sub tab and then press 1. ≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating the sub tab and then pressing or . to select • If there are page tabs (D), then after the page tabs have finished switching, the next sub tab is switched to. (D) 4 Select a menu item. ≥Press 34 to select a menu item and then press 1. ≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating the menu item and then pressing or .
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods 5 Select a setting item and then confirm your selection. 6 Close the menu. ≥Press 34 to select a setting item and then press ≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating the setting item and then pressing or . ≥Press the shutter button halfway. ≥You can also close the menu by pressing [ 102 or . to select ] several times.
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods Displaying Descriptions About Menu Items and Settings If you press [DISP.] while a menu item or setting item is selected, a description about the item is displayed on the screen. Grayed Out Menu Items Menu items that cannot be set are displayed grayed out. If you press or while a grayed out menu item is selected, the reason why it cannot be set is displayed. • The reason why a menu item cannot be set may not be displayed depending on the menu item.
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods [Reset] Return each of the following settings to the default setting: • Recording settings • Network settings (settings of [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth]) • Setup and custom settings (other than [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth]) ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Reset] • If the setup and custom settings are reset, the [Playback] menu is also reset.
Basic Operations – Entering Characters Entering Characters Follow the steps below when the character entry screen is displayed. 1 Enter characters. ≥Press 3421 to select characters and then press until the character to enter is displayed. (Repeat this) • To repeatedly enter the same character, rotate or or to the right to move the entry position cursor.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode Intelligent Auto Mode The [iA] mode (Intelligent Auto mode) can record images using settings automatically selected by the camera. The camera detects the scene to set the optimal recording settings automatically to match the subject and recording conditions. 1 Set the recording mode to [iA]. 2 Aim the camera at the subject. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥When the camera detects the scene, the recording mode icon changes.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode 3 Adjust the focus. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. ≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon lights. (When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.) •[ ] of the AF mode works and the AF area is displayed aligned to any humans.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode 4 Start recording. ≥Press the shutter button fully to take pictures. ≥Press either the video rec. button or the sub video rec. button to record videos. • Backlight compensation operates automatically to prevent subjects from appearing dark when there is a backlight.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode Types of Automatic Scene Detection Taking pictures Recording video 3 3 3 3 i-Portrait*1 i-Portrait & Animal *2 i-Scenery 3 3 i-Macro 3 3 i-Night Portrait*3 3 i-Night Scenery 3 i-Food 3 i-Sunset 3 i-Low Light 3 3 3 *1 Detected when [Detecting Subject] in the [Photo] ([Focus]) menu is set to [HUMAN] or [FACE/EYE]. *2 Detected when [Detecting Subject] in the [Photo] ([Focus]) menu is set to [ANIMAL+HUMAN].
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode AF Mode Changing the AF mode. • Each press of [ ] changes the AF mode. • The mode can also be changed by touching the screen or pressing and holding the joystick. • [AF Detection Setting] is fixed to [ON]. • The [Detecting Subject] setting is maintained for any recording mode other than [iA] mode.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode [ ] ([Tracking]) When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. Aim the AF area over the subject and then press and hold the shutter button halfway. • The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway or fully.
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions Recording Using Touch Functions ≥ Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 112 ≥ Touch AE: 115 Touch AF/Touch Shutter Touch functions allow you to focus on the point that you touch, release the shutter, etc. • With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions 1 2 Touch [ ]. Touch the icon. ≥The icon switches each time you touch it. AF (Touch AF) Focus on the touched position. (Touch Shutter) Record with focus on the touched position. (OFF) 3 (When set to anything other than OFF) Touch the subject.
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions • When the Touch Shutter fails, the AF area first turns red and then disappears.
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions Touch AE This function adjusts the brightness according to a touched position. When a subject’s face appears dark, you can make the screen brighter to match the face. • With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. (Î[Touch Settings]: 558) 1 2 Touch [ Touch [ ]. AE ]. ≥The Touch AE settings screen appears.
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions 3 Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the brightness. • To return the position to which to adjust the brightness to the center, touch [Reset]. ュリヴヱハ 4 5HVHW 6HW Touch [Set]. How to Disable Touch AE Touch [ ]. • You can also adjust both the focus and brightness to those of the position you touch.
Taking Pictures These are the basic operations and settings for taking pictures.
Taking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations Basic Picture Operations 1 Adjust the focus. ≥Press the shutter button halfway (press it gently). ≥The aperture value (A) and shutter speed (B) are displayed. (When the correct exposure cannot be obtained, the indications blink in red.) ≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon (C) lights. (When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.) • You can also perform the same operation by pressing [AF ON]. 60 (C) (B) F2.
Taking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations 2 Start recording. ≥Press the shutter button fully (press it further). • Recorded pictures can be displayed automatically by setting [Auto Review] of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) menu. You can also change the picture display duration to your preferred setting. (Î[Auto Review]: 565) • With the default settings, you cannot take a picture until the subject is brought into focus.
Taking Pictures – [Aspect Ratio] [Aspect Ratio] You can select the image aspect ratio.
Taking Pictures – [Picture Size] [Picture Size] Sets the picture’s image size. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Picture Size] [Aspect Ratio] Picture size [L] (25M) [4:3] [3:2] [16:9] [1:1] 5776×4336 [M] (12.5M) 4096×3072 [S] (6.5M) 2944×2208 [L] (22M) 5776×3848 [M] (11M) 4096×2728 [S] (5.5M) 2944×1960 [L] (18.5M) 5776×3248 [M] (9.5M) 4096×2304 [S] (5M) 2944×1656 [L] (19M) 4336×4336 [M] (9.5M) 3072×3072 [S] (5M) 2208×2208 • When [Ex. Tele Conv.
Taking Pictures – [Picture Size] • When the following functions are being used, [Picture Size] is not available: – [RAW] ([Picture Quality]) – High Resolution mode 122
Taking Pictures – [Picture Quality] [Picture Quality] Set the compression rate used for storing pictures. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Picture Quality] [FINE] JPEG images that give priority to image quality. File format: JPEG [STD.] JPEG images of standard image quality. This is useful for increasing the number of recordable pictures without changing the picture size. File format: JPEG [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.] This records RAW and JPEG images ([FINE] or [STD.]) simultaneously.
Taking Pictures – [Picture Quality] Note on RAW RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed on the camera. Playback and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated software. • You can process RAW images on the camera. (Î[RAW Processing]: 496) • Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to process and edit RAW files on a PC.
Recording Videos These are the basic operations and settings for recording videos. • Please also refer to the following chapters for more detailed information about recording videos: – Video Settings: 344 – Special Video Recording: 414 – HDMI Output (Video): 457 ≥ Basic Video Operations: 126 ≥ [System Frequency]: 132 ≥ [Rec.
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations Basic Video Operations It is possible to record video with a maximum resolution of 5.8K (5760×4320) on this camera. It also supports switching of the system frequency and 3 types of recording file format; MP4, MOV, and Apple ProRes. In the [ ] mode (Creative Video mode), which is specifically for video recording, you can use all of the video functions. 1 Start recording. ≥Press the video rec. button (A).
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations (C) 2 (B) Stop recording. ≥Press the video rec. button (A) again. ≥You can also perform the same operation by pressing the sub video rec. button (B). Screen Displays While Video Recording The live view angle of view changes to the angle of view for video recording, and video recording time (E) and elapsed recording time (F) are displayed. • “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations • If maintaining focus on the subject is difficult during video recording with AF, press the shutter button halfway to re-adjust the focus. Exposure Control While Video Recording Videos will be recorded using the aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity settings below. Recording mode Aperture value/shutter speed/ISO sensitivity The camera automatically makes the settings to suit the scene.
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations Size Interval for Dividing Files A new file will be created to continue recording if the continuous recording time or the file size exceeds the following conditions. File division [Rec.
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations • When the remaining capacity of the battery or card gets low during video recording, the tally lamps blink at long intervals. When there is no remaining capacity in the battery or card, video recording is stopped and the tally lamps blink at short intervals. • If an operation such as a zoom or button operation is performed during video recording, that operation sound may be recorded. • The lens operation sound (AF and image stabilizer) may be recorded to video.
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations • You can set the temperature during video recording at which the camera automatically stops recording: (Î[Thermal Management]: 595) • You can switch the recording screen display to suit video recording just as with the [ ] mode: (Î[Video-Priority Display]: 578) • You can set whether to have the tally lamps light or turn off.
Recording Videos – [System Frequency] [System Frequency] This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played back with the camera. The default setting is for the system frequency to be set to the TV broadcast system for the region where the camera was purchased. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [System Frequency] [59.94Hz (NTSC)] System frequency for regions using the NTSC broadcasting system [50.00Hz (PAL)] System frequency for regions using the PAL broadcasting system [24.
Recording Videos – [System Frequency] • After changing the setting, turn the camera off and on. • If you record using a system frequency that differs from the broadcasting system of your region, it may not be possible for you to properly play back videos on your TV. We recommend using the setting as it was at the time of purchase if you are unsure about broadcasting systems or if you will not be involved in producing cinema film.
Recording Videos – [Rec. File Format] [Rec. File Format] Sets the recording file format of videos to be recorded. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Rec. File Format] [MP4] This file format is suitable for playback on PCs. [MOV] This file format is suitable for image editing. [Apple ProRes] Records using the Apple ProRes codec. This file format is suitable for image editing. • This is available in [ ] mode.
Recording Videos – [Rec. File Format] • The following types of video cannot be recorded to SD cards. Use CFexpress cards.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [Rec Quality] Sets the image quality of videos to be recorded. The image qualities you can select depend on the recording mode, [System Frequency], and [Rec. File Format] settings. The [Image Area of Video] setting items you can select depend on the [Rec Quality] settings.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Rec Quality] • To record video with a bit rate of 72 Mbps or more, you require an SD card with the corresponding Speed Class. • Video with a bit rate of 800 Mbps or more cannot be recorded to an SD card. Use a CFexpress card. • [Apple ProRes] video with a resolution of 4K or more cannot be recorded to an SD card. Use a CFexpress card.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [Rec. File Format]: [MP4] • YUV, Bit value, Image compression: – [10bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP – [8bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 8 bit, Long GOP • Audio format: AAC (2ch) (A) Recording frame rate (B) Bit rate (Mbps) (C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC) [System Frequency]: [59.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [Rec. File Format]: [MOV] • YUV, Bit value, Image compression: – [422/10-I] recording quality: 4:2:2, 10 bit, ALL-Intra – [422/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:2, 10 bit, Long GOP – [420/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP • Audio format: LPCM (4ch)*1 : Available in Creative Video mode. (A) Recording frame rate (B) Bit rate (Mbps) (C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC) [System Frequency]: [59.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [C4K/48p/422/10-L] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 200 [C4K/48p/420/10-L] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 200 HEVC AVC [C4K/30p/422/10-I] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 400 AVC [C4K/30p/422/10-L] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 150 AVC [C4K/30p/420/10-L] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 150 HEVC [C4K/24p/422/10-I] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 400 AVC [C4K/24p/422/10-L] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 150 AVC [C4K/24p/420/10-L] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 23.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [FHD/240p/422/10-I] 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 239.76p 800 AVC [FHD/240p/422/10-L] 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 239.76p 200 AVC [FHD/240p/420/10-L] 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 239.76p 200 HEVC [FHD/120p/422/10-I] 3 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 119.88p 400 AVC [FHD/120p/422/10-L] 3 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 119.88p 150 AVC [FHD/120p/420/10-L] 3 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 119.88p 150 HEVC [FHD/60p/422/10-I] 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 59.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)] [Image Area of Video] [Rec Quality] Resolution FULL Aspect ratio (A) (B) (C) [5.8K/25p/420/10-L] 3 3 5760×4320 4:3 25.00p 200 HEVC [5.7K/50p/420/10-L] 3 3 5728×3024 17:9 50.00p 300 HEVC [5.7K/25p/420/10-L] 3 3 5728×3024 17:9 25.00p 200 HEVC [4.4K/50p/420/10-L] 3 3 4352×3264 4:3 50.00p 300 HEVC [C4K/100p/420/10-L] 3 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 100.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [FHD/200p/422/10-I] 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 200.00p 800 AVC [FHD/200p/422/10-L] 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 200.00p 200 AVC [FHD/200p/420/10-L] 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 200.00p 200 HEVC [FHD/100p/422/10-I] 3 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 100.00p 400 AVC [FHD/100p/422/10-L] 3 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 100.00p 150 AVC [FHD/100p/420/10-L] 3 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 100.00p 150 HEVC [FHD/50p/422/10-I] 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 50.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)] [Image Area of Video] [Rec Quality] Resolution FULL Aspect ratio (A) (B) (C) [5.8K/24p/420/10-L] 3 3 5760×4320 4:3 24.00p 200 HEVC [5.7K/48p/420/10-L] 3 3 5728×3024 17:9 48.00p 300 HEVC [5.7K/24p/420/10-L] 3 3 5728×3024 17:9 24.00p 200 HEVC [4.4K/48p/420/10-L] 3 3 4352×3264 4:3 48.00p 300 HEVC [C4K/120p/420/10-L] 3 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 120.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes] • Audio format: LPCM (4ch)* : Available in Creative Video mode. (A) Recording frame rate (B) Bit rate (Gbps) (C) Video compression format (422 HQ: Apple ProRes 422 HQ, 422: Apple ProRes 422) [System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)] [Image Area of Video] [Rec Quality] Resolution Aspect ratio (A) (B) (C) 422 HQ FULL [5.7K/30p/422 HQ] 3 3 5728×3024 17:9 29.97p 1.9 [5.7K/30p/422] 3 3 5728×3024 17:9 29.97p 1.3 422 [5.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] • In this document, videos are indicated as follows according to their resolution: – 5.8K (5760×4320) video: 5.8K video – 5.7K (5728×3024) video: 5.7K video – 4.4K (4352×3264) video: 4.4K video – C4K (4096×2160) video: C4K video – 4K (3840×2160) video: 4K video – Full High Definition (1920×1080) video: FHD video • Since the camera employs the VBR recording format, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the subject to record.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [Filtering] When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes], you can specify items such as frame rate, number of pixels (resolution), and compression format (YUV, bit value, image compression), and just display recording qualities that meet those conditions. 1 In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [DISP.]. 2 Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] [add to list] Select a recording quality and register it in My List. The recording quality you register can be set in [Rec Quality (My List)]. In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [Q]. • The following settings are also registered at the same time: – [System Frequency] – [Rec. File Format] – [Image Area of Video] Setting or deleting in My List 1 Select [Rec Quality (My List)].
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality] Setting from the control panel It is possible to display the My List of recording qualities from the control panel in [ ] mode or when [Video-Priority Display] is set. Touch the recording quality item. • When already registered in My List, the [Rec Quality (My List)] setting screen is displayed. When not yet registered, the [Rec Quality] setting screen is displayed. • [Rec Quality (My List)] and [Rec Quality] switch each time you press the [DISP.] button.
Recording Videos – [Image Area of Video] [Image Area of Video] Set the image area during video recording. The angle of view differs depending on the image area. Narrowing the image area allows you to achieve a telescopic effect without image deterioration. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Image Area of Video] [FULL] Records according to the range that corresponds to the image circle of the lens that is for Micro Four Thirds.
Recording Videos – [Image Area of Video] Image area (Ex.
Focus / Zoom Smoother focusing is possible by selecting the focus mode and AF mode most suited to the recording conditions and the subject.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode Selecting the Focus Mode Select the focusing method (focus mode) to match subject movement. It is also possible to customize the AF tracking features with [AFC]. (Î[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 160) Set the focus mode lever. [S] ([AFS]) This is suitable for recording still subjects. When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera focuses once. The focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode • In the following cases, [AFC] works the same as [AFS] when the shutter button is pressed halfway: –[ ] mode – During video recording – In low light situations • When the following functions are being used, [AFC] switches to [AFS]: – SH burst recording – High Resolution mode 154
Focus / Zoom – Using AF Using AF ≥ [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 160 ≥ [Focus Limiter]: 163 ≥ [AF Assist Light]: 165 ≥ [1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 166 AF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing. Select the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and scene. 1 Set the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC]. 2 Select the AF mode. ≥Set the focus mode lever. (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 153) ≥Press [ using ] to display the AF mode selection screen, and set or .
Focus / Zoom – Using AF 3 Press the shutter button halfway. ≥The AF operates.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF Low illumination AF • In dark environments, low illumination AF automatically operates, and the focus icon is indicated as [ LOW ]. • Achieving focus may take more time than usual. Starlight AF • If the camera detects stars in the night sky after determining low illumination AF, then Starlight AF will be activated. When focus is achieved, the focus icon will display [ displayed on the area in focus. • Edges of the screen cannot detect Starlight AF.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF • Subjects and recording conditions that make focusing difficult with AF mode – Fast-moving subjects – Extremely bright subjects – Subjects without contrast – Subjects recorded through windows – Subjects near shiny objects – Subjects in very dark locations – When recording subjects both distant and near • When the following operations are performed while recording with [AFC], it may take some time for the camera to focus: – When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end
Focus / Zoom – Using AF • You can restrict the range for AF to work: (Î[Focus Limiter]: 163) • When camera shake reduces, it is possible to focus automatically: (Î[Quick AF]: 556) • You can change the settings so that AF does not function when the shutter button is pressed halfway: (Î[Half-Press Shutter]: 555) • The AF beep volume and sound can be changed: (Î[Beep]: 598) • You can assign the function that makes AF work so that it prioritizes subjects close by to an Fn button.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] You can select features of AF operation when taking pictures with [AFC] that are appropriate for the subject and scene. Each of these features can be further customized. 1 Set the focus mode to [AFC]. 2 Set [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]. ≥Set the focus mode lever. (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 153) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] [Set 1] Basic general-purpose setting.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF Adjusting AF Custom Settings 1 Press 21 to select the AF Custom setting type. 2 Press 34 to select items and press 21 to adjust. • A description of the item is displayed on the screen when you press [DISP.]. • To reset settings to the default, press [Q]. 3 Press or . Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of subjects. When the distance to the subject changes drastically, [+] the camera re-adjusts the focus immediately.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF Sets the tracking method for changes in the speed of subject movement. • At larger setting values, the camera tries to maintain focus by responding even to sudden movements of the subject. [Moving Subject However, the camera becomes more sensitive to slight Prediction] movements of the subject, so focusing may become unstable. [0] [+1] [+2] This is suited to a subject with minimal changes in speed. These are suited to a subject that changes its speed.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF [Focus Limiter] You can restrict the range for AF to work. The focusing speed of AF increases when you limit the range where AF works. 1 Set the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC]. 2 Set [Focus Limiter]. ≥Set the focus mode lever. (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 153) ¨[ ≥ ]¨[ ]/[ ] ¨ [Focus Limiter] [ON] Enables the following settings. [OFF] Disables the following settings.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF • This can be set when using a lens with a focus ring or a focus lever. • It cannot be set if the focusing distance range selector switch of the lens has been used to limit the operation range. • The setting values are reset when the lens is replaced. • When [Focus Limiter] is working, [ ]/[ ] is displayed on the screen.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF [AF Assist Light] When recording in low light conditions, the AF assist light turns on when you press the shutter button halfway, making it easier for the camera to focus. ¨[ ]/[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [AF Assist Light] Settings: [ON]/[OFF] • The effective range of the AF assist light is different depending on the lens used. – When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is attached and at wide-angle end. Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF [1-Area AF Moving Speed] Sets the speed when moving a single AF area.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode Selecting the AF Mode ≥ Automatic Detection: 170 ≥ [Tracking]: 173 ≥ [Full Area AF]: 175 ≥ [Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/[Zone]: 179 ≥ [1-Area+]/[1-Area]: 182 ≥ [Pinpoint]: 184 Select the focusing method to match the position and number of subjects. In an AF mode other than Pinpoint, you can automatically focus by detecting humans and animals. 1 Press [ ]. ≥The AF mode selection screen appears.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode 2 Select the AF mode. ≥Press 21 to select an item and then press ≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ ]. [Tracking] (Î[Tracking]: 173) [Full Area AF] (Î[Full Area AF]: 175) [Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] (Î[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]: 179) [Zone] (Î[Zone]: 180) [1-Area+] (Î[1-Area+]: 182) [1-Area] (Î[1-Area]: 182) [Pinpoint] (Î[Pinpoint]: 184) 168 or .
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode • In [Time Lapse Shot], [ ] cannot be used.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode Automatic Detection When automatic detection is enabled, humans and animals are detected and the camera automatically focuses. You can set the target for detection. 1 Set [AF Detection Setting] to [ON]. ¨[ ≥ ]/[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [AF Detection Setting] ¨ [ON] • You can also press 3 in the AF mode selection screen to switch automatic 2 detection [ON]/[OFF]. Select [Detecting Subject].
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode When [ ] When the camera detects a person’s face (A)/(B) or body or an animal’s body (C), an AF area is displayed. If multiple subjects are detected, multiple AF areas are also displayed, and you can select the subject you want to focus on from amongst these. (B) (A) (C) Yellow AF area to be brought into focus. The camera selects this automatically. • Eye detection works only for the eyes inside the yellow frame (A).
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode When [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] If even part of a human or animal enters the AF area, these are automatically detected and focused. • If eyes are detected inside the AF area, eye detection (D) works. It is not possible to change the eye to focus on. (D) • [AF Detection Setting] is applied to all AF modes excluding [ ]. • When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus. The exposure will be adjusted to the face.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode [Tracking] When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. Start tracking. ≥ Aim the AF area over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway. The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway or pressed fully. • If tracking fails, the AF area blinks red. • When set to [AFS], the focus will be on the AF area position. Tracking will not work.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode • In [ ] mode and while recording video, tracking will continue even if the shutter button is released. To cancel tracking, press or , or touch [ ]. Tracking is also available with [AFS]. • When automatic detection is working, the detected subject is tracked. • Set [Metering Mode] to [ ] to continue to adjust the exposure as well. • In the following, [ ] operates as [ ]: – [Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome D]/[L.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode [Full Area AF] The camera selects the most optimal AF area to focus from 315 areas. When multiple AF areas are selected, all selected AF areas will be brought into focus. When the focus mode is set to [AFC], you can ensure that the focus stays on the subject by recording while keeping the subject within the Full Area AF area.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode Specify the Person, Animal, or Eye to Bring into Focus When automatic detection is [ON], multiple subjects are detected. When the person or animal to be brought into focus is shown using the white AF area, you can change this to a yellow AF area. ≥ Touch operations Touch the person, animal or eye indicated with the white AF area. • The AF area will change to yellow. • Touching outside the AF area displays the AF area setting screen.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode ≥ Button operations 1 Press [ 2 Select [ 3 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area. 4 When the white AF area changes to yellow, press • If [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen. ], [ ], or [ ] and then press 4. . is pressed in a position outside an AF area for humans or animals, the ] AF area is set. • To cancel the setting, press .
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode Setting the AF Area in Any Position When [AF Detection Setting] is [OFF], the [ position. ] AF area can be set in any ≥ Touch operations Touch any position on the recording screen and then touch [Set]. • The [ ] AF area is set. • Touch [ ] to return to [ ]. ≥ Operations with the joystick Press and hold the joystick. • The [ ] AF area is set in the center of the screen.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode [Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/ [Zone] [Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] Within the full area, vertical and horizontal zones can be focused.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode [Zone] Within the full area, a central oval zone can be focused.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode Move and Change the Size of the AF Area 1 Press [ 2 Select [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen. 3 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area. ] or [ ] and then press 4. • You can also move the AF area by touching. When [ ] is selected • Press 34 to switch to a horizontal pattern AF area. • Press 21 to switch to a vertical pattern AF area. • Press [DISP.] to return the AF area position to the center.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode [1-Area+]/ [1-Area] [1-Area+] Emphasis within a single AF area can be focused. Even when the subject moves out of the single AF area, the subject remains focused in a supplementary AF area (E). ]. • Effective when recording moving subjects that are difficult to track with [ (E) [1-Area] Specify the point to be brought into focus.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode Move and Change the Size of the AF Area 1 Press [ 2 Select [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen. 3 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area. 4 Rotate 5 Press ] or [ , ] and then press 4. or to change the size of the AF area. . Operations on the AF area movement screen Button Touch operations operations 3421 Touch Description of operation Moves the AF area. • Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode [Pinpoint] You can achieve a more precise focus on a small point. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus will be enlarged. • When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ • Automatic detection does not work in [ ] is not available. ].
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode Move the Position of the AF Area 1 Press [ 2 Select [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen. 3 Press 3421 to set the position of [+] and then press ] and then press 4. or . • Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick. • The selected position on the screen will be enlarged. • The AF area cannot be moved to the edge of the screen. 4 Press 3421 to fine-adjust the position of [+]. 5 Press or .
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode Operations on the Magnification Window Button Touch operations operations 3421 Touch Description of operation Moves [+]. • Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick. Pinch out/ pinch in — Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps. Enlarges/reduces the screen. Switches magnification window (windowed mode/full screen mode). First time: Returns to the screen in Step 3. [DISP.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation AF Area Movement Operation ≥ Moving the AF Area by Touch: 190 ≥ Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad: 192 ≥ [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 194 In default settings, you can use the joystick to directly move and change the size of the AF area when recording. 1 Move the position of the AF area. ≥On the recording screen, tilt the joystick.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation • Pressing enables switching between the default and set AF area positions. In [ 2 ], this operation displays the enlarged screen. Change the size of the AF area. ≥Rotate , or . • The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF area position to the center. The second press returns the size of the AF area to the default. 3 Confirm your selection. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. ≥This will return you to the recording screen.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation • When [Metering Mode] is [ ], the metering target also moves together with the AF area. • In [ ], [ ], and [ ], the size of the AF area cannot be changed.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation Moving the AF Area by Touch You can move the AF area to a touched position on the monitor. You can also change the size of the AF area. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Touch Settings] ¨ Select [Touch AF] [AF] This focuses on the touched subject. [AF+AE] This focuses on and adjusts brightness for the touched subject. • The default setting is [AF]. Focus on the Touched Position ([AF]) 1 Touch the subject. 2 Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF area size.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]) 1 Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the brightness. • At the touched position, an AF area that works in the same way as [ ] is displayed. This places a point to adjust brightness at the center of the AF area. ュリヴヱハ 2 5HVHW 6HW Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF area size. • The first touch of [Reset] returns the AF area position to the center.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad During viewfinder display, you can touch the monitor to change the position and size of the AF area. 1 Set [Touch Pad AF]. 2 Move the position of the AF area. 3 Change the size of the AF area. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Touch Settings] ¨ [Touch Pad AF] ¨ [EXACT]/[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7] ≥During viewfinder display, touch the monitor. ≥Rotate , or . • The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF area position to the center.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation Setting Items ([Touch Pad AF]) [EXACT] Moves the AF area of the viewfinder by touching a desired position on the touch pad. [OFFSET1] (entire area)/[OFFSET2] (right half)/[OFFSET3] (upper right)/[OFFSET4] (lower right)/[OFFSET5] (left half)/[OFFSET6] (upper left)/[OFFSET7] (lower left) Moves the AF area of the viewfinder according to the distance you drag your finger on the touch pad. Select the range to be detected with the drag operation.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] Memorizes separate positions for AF areas for when the camera is vertically aligned and for when it is horizontally aligned. Two vertical orientations, left and right, are available. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] [ON] Memorizes separate positions for vertical and horizontal orientations. [OFF] Sets the same position for vertical and horizontal orientations. • In MF, this memorizes the MF Assist position.
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF Record Using MF ≥ [Focus Peaking]: 202 MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing. Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate AF. 1 Set the focus mode to [MF]. 2 Select the focus point. ≥Set the focus mode lever. (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 153) ≥Tilt the joystick to select the focus point. • To return the point to be brought into focus to the center, press [DISP.
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF 3 Confirm your selection. 4 Adjust the focus. ≥Press . ≥This switches to the MF Assist screen, and shows an enlarged display. ≥The operations used to focus manually differ depending on the lens.
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF When using the interchangeable lens with a focus lever Move to (C) side: Focuses on a nearby subject Move to (D) side: Focuses on a distant subject • The focusing speed varies depending on how far you move the focus lever. (C) (D) When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring Press 1: Focuses on a nearby subject Press 2: Focuses on a distant subject • Pressing and holding 21 will increase the focus speed. • Focus can also be adjusted by dragging the slide bar (E).
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF • This will display the in-focus portion highlighted with color. (Focus Peaking) • A recording distance guideline is displayed. (MF Guide) (F) (m)∞ (G) 1 0.5 0.3 AF (I) (H) (F) MF Assist (enlarged screen) (G) Focus Peaking (H) MF Guide (I) Indicator for ¶ (infinity) 5 Close the MF Assist screen. 6 Start recording. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. ≥This operation can also be performed by pressing ≥Press the shutter button fully. 198 .
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF Operations on the MF Assist Screen Button Touch operations operations 3421* Drag Description of operation Moves the enlarged display position. • Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick. Pinch out/ pinch in — Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps. Enlarges/reduces the screen. Switches magnification window (windowed mode/full screen mode). First time: Returns the MF Assist position to the [DISP.] * * [Reset] center.
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF • On the recording screen, you can rotate the focus ring to display the MF Assist screen. If the focus ring has been rotated to enlarge the display, the assist screen will be exited a short time after you cease the operation. • You can also display the MF Assist screen by pressing the [ ]. • MF Assist and MF Guide may not display depending on the lens used. You can, however, display MF Assist by directly operating the camera using the touch screen or a button.
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF • You can change the Focus Peaking sensitivity and the display method: (Î[Focus Peaking]: 202) • You can memorize the MF Assist position separately for vertical and horizontal orientations: (Î[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 194) • You can change the display method of the magnified screen: (Î[MF Assist]: 553) • You can change the MF Guide display units: (Î[MF Guide]: 553) • You can disable focus ring operation: (Î[Focus Ring Lock]: 554) • You can set the movement of the
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF [Focus Peaking] During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted with color. ¨[ [ON] ]/[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Focus Peaking] Focus Peaking display is performed. [OFF] — [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] [Display Color] If adjusted to the negative direction, portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you to achieve a more precise focus. You can set the display color of the in-focus portion.
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF • You can display the Touch Tab (Î[Touch Settings]: 558) and then touch [ in [ ] to switch [ON]/[OFF]. • When [Live View Boost] is being used, [Focus Peaking] is not available.
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom Recording with Zoom ≥ Extended Tele Conversion: 206 ≥ [Power Zoom Lens]: 208 Use the optical zoom of the lens to zoom to telephoto or wide-angle. When taking pictures, use [Ex. Tele Conv.] to increase a telescopic effect without image deterioration. When recording videos, use [Image Area of Video] to obtain the same telescopic effect as [Ex. Tele Conv.].
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom Interchangeable lens that supports power zoom (electronic zoom) Move the zoom lever. (The zoom speed varies depending on how far you move the lever.) • If you assign [Zoom Control] to an Fn button, you can operate optical zoom slowly by pressing 21 or fast by pressing 34. (ÎFn Buttons: 517) (T) (W) Interchangeable lens that does not support zoom Optical zoom is not available. ≥ The focal length is displayed on the recording screen.
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom Extended Tele Conversion [Ex. Tele Conv.] enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged beyond what is available with the optical zoom, without any deterioration in image quality. • The [Ex. Tele Conv.] maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the [Picture Size] set in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu. – Set to [ M]: 1.4× – Set to [ S]: 2.0× 1 Set [Picture Size] to [M] or [S]. 2 Set [Ex. Tele Conv.].
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom • When displaying the [Ex. Tele Conv.] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing [DISP.] allows you to change the [Picture Size] setting. • When the following functions are being used, [Ex. Tele Conv.
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom [Power Zoom Lens] This sets the zoom operation when using a lens that supports power zoom (motorized zoom). • This is available when using a supported interchangeable lens. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Power Zoom Lens] When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will [Step Zoom] stop at preset focal length positions. • This is not possible during video recording. You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer This chapter describes functions for recording in drive mode and the image stabilizer function.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode Selecting the Drive Mode You can switch the drive mode to Single, Burst, etc. to match the recording conditions. Rotating the drive mode dial. [ ] (Single) Takes one picture each time the shutter button is pressed. [ ]/[ ] (Burst) (ÎTaking Burst Pictures: 212) Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode • The detailed setting screens for each drive mode can be called up with an Fn button: [ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Fn Button Set] ¨ [Setting in REC mode] ¨ [Drive Mode Setting] 211
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures Taking Burst Pictures Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held. You can select burst recording settings to suit the recording conditions, including [H], [M], and [L] which enable burst recording with high image quality, and SH burst recording which takes burst pictures at ultra high speeds using an electronic shutter. 1 Set the drive mode to [ Shot 2). ] (Burst Shot 1) or [ ] (Burst ≥Set the drive mode dial.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures [SH75] Takes burst pictures at ultra high speed with the electronic shutter, 75 frames/ second. [SH60] Takes burst pictures at ultra high speed with the electronic shutter, 60 frames/ second. [SH20] Takes burst pictures at ultra high speed with the electronic shutter, 20 frames/ second. [H] Takes high-speed burst pictures. [M] Takes medium-speed burst pictures. [L] Takes low-speed burst pictures. 3 Close the menu. 4 Start recording.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures Burst Rate Mechanical shutter, electronic Live View when Electronic shutter front curtain taking burst pictures [SH75] — 75 frames/second None [SH60] — 60 frames/second None [SH20] — 20 frames/second None 14 frames/second 14 frames/second [H] ([AFS]/[MF]) ([AFS]/[MF]) None ([AFS]/[MF]) (High speed) 8 frames/second 7 frames/second Available ([AFC]) ([AFC]) ([AFC]) [M] 6 frames/second ([AFS]/[MF]) (Medium speed) 5 fra
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures Maximum Number of Frames Recordable [Picture Quality] [RAW+FINE]/ [FINE]/[STD.] [RAW] [RAW+STD.] [SH75] 200 frames*1 [SH60] [SH20] [H] (High speed) 95 frames or [M] more*2, 3/ (Medium speed) 90 frames or [L] more*2, 4 65 frames or *2 40 frames or more more*2, 3/ 50 frames or more*2, 4 (Low speed) • When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously When you press the shutter button halfway, the number of pictures that can be taken continuously will appear on the recording screen. Example) When 20 frames: [r20] ISO100 r20 • Once recording starts, the number of pictures that can be taken continuously will decrease. – During [H]/[M]/[L] burst recording: When [r0] appears, the burst rate decreases.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures Focus when Taking Burst Pictures [Focus/ Shutter Focus mode Priority] (Î[Focus/ Shutter [SH75]/ [SH60]/ [H] [M]/[L] [SH20] Priority]: 552) [FOCUS] [AFS] [BALANCE] Fixed to the focus of the first frame [RELEASE] Estimated [FOCUS] [AFC] [BALANCE] focus — Estimated focus [RELEASE] [MF] Normal focus — Focus set with manual focus • When the subject is dark with [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first frame.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures [SH75]/ Focus mode [H] [SH60]/ [M]/[L] [SH20] [AFS] [AFC] [MF] Fixed to the exposure of the first frame — The exposure is The exposure is adjusted for each adjusted for each frame frame Fixed to the exposure of the first frame 218
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures • It may take a while to save burst pictures. If you continue to take burst pictures while saving is in progress, the maximum number of frames recordable will be reduced. When taking burst pictures, we recommend using a high-speed card. • For information about the high temperature display (ÎFor information about the high temperature display: 130) Notes on SH burst recording • [AFC] focus mode switches to [AFS]. • [Shutter Type] is fixed to [ELEC.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode High Resolution mode This merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images. This function is suitable for recording subjects that do not move. When [Handheld High-Res] is set to on, you can record pictures with a higher resolution without using a tripod. The picture after merging can be saved in RAW or JPEG format. • When recording with [Handheld High-Res] set to [OFF], use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode [Handheld High-Res] You can record without using a tripod. Turn on the image stabilizer function. • When [OFF], the image stabilizer function is not available. [Picture Quality] Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored. [COMBINED]/[FINE]/[RAW+FINE]/[RAW] • When set to [COMBINED], recording is with the same settings as [Picture Quality] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu. (However, [STD.] changes to [FINE].
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode [Simul Record Normal Shot] Simultaneously takes pictures that are not merged when [ON] is set. The first picture will be saved with [Picture Size] set to [L]. [Shutter Delay] Sets the delay time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is released. [30 SEC]/[15 SEC]/[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[1/2 SEC]/[1/4 SEC]/[1/8 SEC]/[Off] [Motion Blur Processing] Sets the correction method to use when the subject moved.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode 3 Decide on the composition and then fix the camera in place. • If blurring is detected, the High Resolution mode icon (A) blinks. • When [Handheld High-Res] is set to [ON], the icon changes to [ ]. (A) 4 Start recording. ≥Press the shutter button fully. • With the default settings, [Shutter Delay] is activated, so there will be a gap in time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is released.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode • In High Resolution mode, recording will be performed using the following settings: – [Shutter Type]: Fixed to [ELEC.] – Minimum aperture value: F11 – Shutter speed: 1 second to 1/32000 of a second – ISO sensitivity: Upper limit to [1600] – Focus mode: [AFS]/[MF] • Hold the camera firmly during handheld recording so that the camera does not shake. Recording may fail if there is a lot of shaking.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot Recording with Time Lapse Shot Pictures are taken automatically at a set recording interval. This feature is ideal for keeping track of changes over time in subjects such as animals and plants. The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can also be combined into a video. (ÎGroup Images: 492) • Check that the clock is set correctly.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot 3 Set the recording settings. [Mode] Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation. [Shooting Interval Setting] [ON]: Sets the interval before the next recording takes place. [OFF]: Takes pictures without leaving recording intervals. [Start Time] [Now]: Starts recording when the shutter button is pressed fully. [After 2 Seconds]: Starts recording 2 seconds after the shutter button is pressed fully.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot 4 Close the menu. 5 Start recording. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. ≥Press the shutter button fully. • When [Start Time Set] is set, the camera will enter into sleep status until the start time is reached. • During recording standby, the camera enters into sleep status when no operation is performed for a certain period of time. 6 • The recording will stop automatically. Create a video.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot Setting Assistant for Time Lapse Shot Recording When [DISP.] is pressed in the [Image Count]/[Shooting Interval] setting screen, [Image Count] and [Shooting Interval] can be set by automatically calculating them from the frame rate, time, and recording duration of the video to be created. 1 Press 34 to select the item and then press or . [Production Frame Rate] Sets the frame rate of videos to be created.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot • [Image Count] can be set in the range between 1 and 9999. • [Shooting Interval] is set in the range between 00m01s and 99m59s. Decimal places are rounded down if the number is not evenly divisible. • When the setting is one where recording is not possible, [Image Count] or [Shooting Interval] is displayed in red letters. • When [Shooting Interval Setting] is [OFF], the Time Lapse Shot settings cannot be automatically calculated.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot Operations during Time Lapse Shot Recording Pressing the shutter button halfway during sleep status will turn on the camera. • You can perform the following operations by pressing [Q] during Time Lapse Shot recording. [Continue] Returns to the recording. (Only during recording) [Pause] Pauses the recording. (Only during recording) [Resume] Resumes the recording. (Only while paused) • You can also press the shutter button to resume.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot • Pictures recorded to more than one card cannot be combined into a single video. • The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take pictures at the set interval or take the set number of pictures. Furthermore, it may not end at the end time displayed on the screen. • Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation Recording with Stop Motion Animation Take pictures while moving the subject little by little. The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can be combined into a stop motion video. (ÎGroup Images: 492) 1 Set the drive mode to [ 2 Set [Mode] to [Stop Motion Animation]. ]. ≥Set the drive mode dial.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation 3 Set the recording settings. [Mode] Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation. [Add to Picture Group] Allows you to continue recording for a set of stop motion images that have already been recorded. 5 • Select an image and proceed to Step . [Auto Shooting] [ON]: Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval. [OFF]: This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation 5 Start recording. ≥Press the shutter button fully. ≥Take pictures repeatedly while moving the subject little by little. • The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them as reference for the amount of movement. • You can play back the recorded stop motion images by pressing [ recording. Press [ ] to delete unnecessary images. To return to the recording screen, press [ 6 ] again. Stop recording.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation 7 Create a video. (ÎTime Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 236) • After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to proceed to create a video. Even if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Stop Motion Video] in the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. (Î[Stop Motion Video]: 509) • Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos After performing Time Lapse Shot or stop motion recording, you can proceed to create a video. • Refer to the sections below about these recording functions.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos 3 Select [OK]. ≥A video will be created in the [MP4] recording file format. [OK] Creates a video. [Rec Quality] Sets the video image quality. [Frame Rate] Sets the number of frames per second. The larger the number is, the smoother the video will be. [Sequence] [NORMAL]: Splices pictures together in recording order. [REVERSE]: Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer Recording Using the Self-timer 1 2 3 4 Set the drive mode to [ ]. ≥Set the drive mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 210) Set the self-timer time. (ÎSetting the Self-timer Time: 240) • When recording videos, set [Self Timer For Video] in [Self Timer Setting] of the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu to [ON]. Close the menu. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. Decide on the composition and then adjust the focus.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer 5 Start recording. ≥Press the shutter button, video rec. button, or sub video rec. button. ≥After the self-timer light blinks, shooting or video recording starts.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer Setting the Self-timer Time ¨[ Picture: ]¨[ ¨[ Video: ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Self Timer] ] ¨ [Self Timer Setting] ¨ Select [Self Timer]* * This can be set by setting [Self Timer For Video] to [ON] in [Self Timer Setting] in the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu. [ ] [ ] Takes a picture after 10 seconds. Takes 3 pictures at approx. 2 second intervals after 10 seconds. (When recording video, it will be the same operation with [ ].
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer • We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer. • [Self Timer] in the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu and [Self Timer] in the [Self Timer Setting] ([Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu) work together.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording Bracket Recording When the shutter button is pressed, the camera can record multiple images while automatically changing the setting value for exposure, aperture, focus or white balance (adjustment value or color temperature).
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording 2 Set [More Settings]. 3 Close the menu. 4 Focus on the subject and then take pictures. ≥For information about [More Settings], refer to page for each bracketing method. ≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording Setting Items ([Bracketing Type]) [ ] (Exposure Bracket) When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the exposure. (Î[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 246) [ ] (Aperture Bracket) When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the aperture value. (Î[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 247) [ ] (Focus Bracket) When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the focus point.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording • White Balance Bracket and White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) are not available when using the following functions: – [iA] mode – Taking burst pictures – [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording [More Settings] (Exposure Bracket) [Step] Sets the image count and exposure compensation step. [3•1/3] (record 3 images in 1/3 EV steps) to [7•1] (record 7 images in 1 EV steps) [Sequence] Sets the order in which images are recorded. [Single Shot Setting] [ ]: Takes only one image each time the shutter button is pressed. [ ]: Takes all of the set number of images when the shutter button is pressed once.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording [More Settings] (Aperture Bracket) [Image Count] [3]/[5]: Records the set number of images while alternately setting the aperture value in the sequence of one before and then one after using the initial aperture value as the reference. [ALL]: Records images using all aperture values. Example when the initial position is set to F8.0 (H-ES12060) (6) (4) (2) (1) (3) (5) (7) 2.8 4.0 5.6 8.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording [More Settings] (Focus Bracket) [Step] Sets the focus adjustment step. • The distance that the focus point is moved becomes shorter if the initial focus point is close, and longer if it is far away. [Image Count] Sets the image count. • This cannot be set when taking burst pictures. Burst pictures are taken while the shutter button is pressed.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording [More Settings] (White Balance Bracket) Rotate or . , or to set the correction step and then press Rotate to the right: Horizontal direction ([A] - [B]) Rotate to the left: Vertical direction ([G] - [M]) • The correction step can also be set by touching [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]. G A B M [More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)) Rotate , or to set the correction step and then press or . ]/[ ].
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode] [Silent Mode] This disables all operation sounds and light output at once. The audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF assist light will be set to forced off mode. • The following settings are fixed: – [Flash Mode]: [ ] (Forced Flash Off) – [AF Assist Light]: [OFF] – [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode] • Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light/blink: – Power indicator – Charging light/Network connection light – Card access lights – Self-timer light • Use this function at your own responsibility sufficiently considering the privacy, portrait, and other rights of subjects.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type] [Shutter Type] ≥ [Long Exposure NR]: 256 ≥ [Min. Shutter Speed]: 257 ≥ [Shutter Delay]: 258 Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type] [AUTO] Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording conditions and shutter speed. [MECH.] Records with the mechanical shutter type. [EFC] Records with the electronic front curtain type. [ELEC.] Records with the electronic shutter type. [ELEC.+NR] Records with the electronic shutter type. When pictures are taken at slower shutter speeds, the shutter is closed after recording to perform long shutter noise reduction.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type] Mechanical Electronic front Electronic shutter shutter type curtain type type This type starts and Mechanism ends exposure with the mechanical shutter. Flash This type starts exposure This type starts and electronically and ends exposure ends it with the electronically. mechanical shutter. 3 3 — [B] (Bulb, max. [B] (Bulb, max. [B] (Bulb, max. Shutter speed approx. approx. approx. (sec.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type] • To reduce shutter-induced blur, you can set the shutter to release a few seconds after the shutter button is pressed: (Î[Shutter Delay]: 258) • When [ ] is displayed on the screen, recording will be with the electronic shutter type. • When a moving subject is recorded using the electronic shutter, the subject may appear distorted in the picture.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type] [Long Exposure NR] The camera automatically removes noise generated when recording images with a slow shutter speed. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Long Exposure NR] Settings: [ON]/[OFF] • Recording is not possible during noise reduction. • When the following functions are being used, [Long Exposure NR] is not available: – Video recording/SH burst recording – [ELEC.] (Excluding [ELEC.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type] [Min. Shutter Speed] Sets the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO]. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Min. Shutter Speed] [AUTO] The camera automatically sets the minimum shutter speed. [1/32000] to [1/1] • The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in recording situations where correct exposure cannot be achieved.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type] [Shutter Delay] To reduce camera shake and shutter-induced blur, the shutter is released after the specified time has passed since the shutter button was pressed.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer Image Stabilizer ≥ Image Stabilizer Settings: 262 This camera can use both the in-body image stabilizer and the in-lens image stabilizer. It is compatible with the Dual I.S.2 system that is an effective combination of the 2 image stabilizers. Furthermore, during video recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer that incorporates electronic stabilization.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer Combinations of lenses and image stabilizers (As of January 2022) Image stabilizers that can be used will differ depending on the attached lens. Available image Attached lens stabilizer Example of icon Panasonic lenses compatible with Dual I.S. mode Body+Lens (Based on the Micro Four (Dual I.S./Dual I.S.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer Using the Image Stabilizer • When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch on the lens to [ON]. • When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this camera, after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens information is displayed. Correctly operating the image stabilization function requires that the focal length be set to match the attached lens.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer Image Stabilizer Settings Set the image stabilizer operation to match the recording situation. ¨[ Picture: ¨[ Video: ]¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Image Stabilizer] ] ¨ Select [Image Stabilizer] [Operation Mode] Sets the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method (normal, panning).
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer • When the following function is being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not available: – [Variable Frame Rate] 263
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer [Operation Mode] Set the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method (normal, panning). [Normal] Corrects vertical, horizontal, and rotational camera shake. This function is suitable for normal recording. [Panning (Left/Right)] Corrects vertical camera shake. This is suitable for horizontal panning. [Panning (Up/Down)] Corrects horizontal camera shake. This is suitable for vertical panning.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer [Boost I.S. (Video)] Increase the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording. This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to perform recording from a fixed perspective. Settings: [ON]/[OFF] • When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is operating, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen. • To change composition while recording, first set this to [OFF] before moving the camera.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer [Lens Information] Register the information for lenses that cannot communicate with the camera. Match the in-body image stabilizer with the information of the lens you register. Press 34 to select the lens information to use and then press or . • In the default setting, the lens information for 6 lenses with a focal length of between 24 mm and 135 mm is registered. The lens information for up to 12 lenses can be registered.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity This chapter describes recording modes for determining exposure and ISO sensitivity.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode] [Metering Mode] Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed. ¨[ [ ]/[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Metering Mode] ] (Multi-metering) Method in which the most suitable exposure is measured by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen. [ ] (Center-weighted) Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the center of the screen.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode] [ ] (Highlight-weighted) Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the highlighted parts of the screen to prevent overexposure. This is suitable for theatre photography, etc. • The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted: (Î[Exposure Offset Adjust.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode Program AE Mode ≥ Program Shift: 272 In [P] mode (Program AE mode), the camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value for the brightness of the subject. You can also use Program Shift to change combinations of shutter speed and aperture values while keeping the same exposure. 1 Set the recording mode to [P]. 2 Press the shutter button halfway. ≥Set the mode dial.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode • If the correct exposure is not achieved, the aperture value (A) and shutter speed (B) blink red. 60 F2.8 (B) (A) 3 Start recording.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode Program Shift You can change the shutter speed and aperture value combination set automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure. With this, you can, for example, make the background more defocused by decreasing the aperture value or capture a moving subject more dynamically by slowing the shutter speed. 1 Press the shutter button halfway.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode • Program Shift is not available when using the following function: – Flash • You can customize dial operations: (Î[Dial Set.]: 562) • The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship between aperture value and shutter speed: (Î[Expo.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode Aperture-Priority AE Mode In [A] mode (Aperture-Priority AE mode), you can set the aperture value before recording. The shutter speed will be automatically set by the camera. Smaller aperture values It becomes easier to defocus the background. Larger aperture values It becomes easier to bring everything into focus including the background.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode 1 Set the recording mode to [A]. 2 Set the aperture value. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) or ≥Rotate . F8.0 3 Start recording. • If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode Depth of Field Characteristics Aperture value Small Large Focal length of lens Telephoto Wide-angle Near More distant Distance to subject Shallow (narrow) Depth of field (area in sharp focus) Deep (wide) Example: When you want Example: When you want to take a image with a to take a image with focus defocused background. as far as the background.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode Shutter-Priority AE Mode In [S] mode (Shutter-Priority AE mode), you can set the shutter speed before recording. The aperture value will be automatically set by the camera.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode 1 Set the recording mode to [S]. 2 Set the shutter speed. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥Rotate or . 250 3 Start recording. • If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode • The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the recording screen. To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (ÎPreview Mode: 285) • The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ. Check the images on the playback screen. • Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when recording using a flash.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode Manual Exposure Mode ≥ Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.): 283 ≥ [B] (Bulb): 284 In [M] mode (Manual Exposure mode), you can record by manually setting the aperture value and shutter speed. In default settings, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO]. As a result, the ISO sensitivity will be adjusted according to the aperture value and shutter speed. Exposure compensation can also be used when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode 2 Set the aperture value and shutter speed. ≥Rotate to set the aperture value (A), and speed (B). 30 to set the shutter F5.6 (B) (A) 3 Start recording. • If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode Manual Exposure Assist When ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assist (example: ) will be displayed on the recording screen. You can check the difference between the current exposure value and the standard exposure (±0) measured by the camera. • Use Manual Exposure Assist as a guide. We recommend checking the images on the playback screen when recording.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.) • [MECH.] [B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/8000 • [EFC] [B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/2000 • [ELEC.] [B] (Bulb, max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 to 1/32000 • The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the recording screen. To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode [B] (Bulb) If you set the shutter speed to [B] (Bulb), the shutter stays open while the shutter button is pressed fully. (up to approx. 30 minutes) The shutter closes when the shutter button is released. Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to record images of fireworks, night scenery or a starry sky. • We recommend using a tripod or the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) during bulb recording.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode Preview Mode You can check the effects of aperture on the recording screen by physically closing the aperture blades of the lens to the aperture value set for actual recording. In addition to the effects of aperture, you can check the effects of shutter speed at the same time. • You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with [Preview]. (ÎFn Buttons: 517) Press the preview button.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode • It is possible to record in preview mode. • Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/32000 of a second. • Depending on the [Constant Preview] setting, there are preview screens that cannot be displayed.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation Exposure Compensation ≥ [Vignetting Comp.]: 290 ≥ [Diffraction Compensation]: 291 You can compensate the exposure when the standard exposure determined by the camera is too bright or too dark. You can adjust the exposure in 1/3 EV steps in a range of ±5 EV. When recording videos, the range changes to ±3 EV. 1 Press [ ].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation 2 Compensate the exposure. ≥Rotate , , or . +1 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 3 Confirm your selection. ≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation • In [M] mode, you can compensate the exposure by setting the ISO sensitivity to [AUTO]. • When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds ±3 EV, the brightness of the recording screen will no longer change. Press the shutter button halfway or use AE Lock to reflect the value on the recording screen. • The set exposure compensation value is stored even if you turn off the camera.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation [Vignetting Comp.] When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics, you can record pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery corrected. ¨[ ]/[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Vignetting Comp.] Settings: [ON]/[OFF] • Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions. • Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation [Diffraction Compensation] The camera raises the image resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction when the aperture is closed. ¨[ ]/[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Diffraction Compensation] Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF] • Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions. • Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same focus and exposure settings while changing the composition. This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or there is a backlight, for example. 1 Register [AE LOCK], [AF LOCK], or [AF/AE LOCK] to the Fn button. (ÎFn Buttons: 517) • These cannot be registered to [Fn4] to [Fn8].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) 2 Lock focus and exposure. ≥Press and hold the Fn button. ≥If focus is locked, then the AF lock icon (A) will be displayed. ≥If exposure is locked, then the AE lock icon (B) will be displayed. (A) AFL AEL (B) 3 Hold the Fn button to decide on the composition and then perform recording. ≥Press the shutter button fully. • Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity ISO Sensitivity ≥ [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 298 You can set light sensitivity (ISO sensitivity). With the default settings, you can set in the range between 100 and 25600 (between 100 and 12800 in [ ] mode) in 1/3 EV increments. 1 Press [ISO].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity 2 Select ISO sensitivity. ≥Rotate , , or . ≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ISO]. AUTO 3 100 200 40 Confirm your selection. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. Characteristics of the ISO Sensitivity By increasing the ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed can be increased in dark places to prevent camera shake and subject blur. However, higher ISO sensitivities also increase the amount of noise in the recorded images.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity) [AUTO] The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the brightness. • Taking picture: Maximum [3200]*1 • Video recording: Maximum [6400]*2 [100] to [25600] (In [ ] mode: [100] to [12800]) The ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected value. • By setting [Extended ISO] (Î[Extended ISO]: 549) to [ON] in the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu, the ISO sensitivity can be extended to a lower limit of [50].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity • You can set upper and lower limits for ISO Auto: (Î[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 298, [ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 362) • You can change the intervals between ISO sensitivity settings values: (Î[ISO Increments]: 548) • The setting range of ISO sensitivity can be extended: (Î[Extended ISO]: 549) • You can set the lower limit for shutter speed for ISO Auto: (Î[Min. Shutter Speed]: 257) • You can change the operation of the [ISO] button: (Î[WB/ISO/Expo.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO]. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO]. • Set in the range between [100] and [12800]. [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
White Balance / Image Quality This chapter describes functions that enable you to record images how you imagine them, such as white balance and Photo Style.
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB) White Balance (WB) ≥ Adjusting the White Balance: 305 White balance (WB) is a function that corrects the color cast produced by the light illuminating the subject. It corrects the colors so that white objects appear in white to make the overall color closer to what is seen by the eye. Normally, you can use auto ([AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw]) to obtain the optimal white balance.
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB) 2 Select the white balance. ≥Rotate , or . ≥Selection is also possible by pressing [WB]. WB 3 AWB AWBc AWBw Confirm your selection. ≥Press the shutter button halfway.
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB) Setting Items (White Balance) [AWB] Auto [AWBc] Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light source) [AWBw] Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light source) [ ] Clear sky [ ] Cloudy sky [ ] Shade under a clear sky [ ] Incandescent light ]* [ Flash [ ] to [ 1 4 ] Set mode 1 to 4 (ÎRegistering the White Set: 304) [ 1 ] to [ 4 ] Color temperatures 1 to 4 (ÎColor Temperature Setting: 304) * It operates as [AWB
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB) (2) (3) (4) (1) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (1) [AWB] will work within this range. (2) Blue sky (3) Cloudy sky (Rain) (4) Shade (5) Sunlight (6) White fluorescent light (7) Incandescent light bulb (8) Sunrise and sunset (9) Candlelight K=Kelvin Color Temperature • Under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, the appropriate white balance will vary depending on the lighting type. Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] or [ 1 ] to [ 4 ].
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB) Registering the White Set Take pictures of a white object under the light source of the recording location to adjust the white balance until it appears white. 1 Press [WB] and then select any value from [ 2 Press 3. 3 Aim the camera at a white object so that it appears inside the frame at the center of the screen and then press or ] to [ 1 4 ]. . • This will set the white balance and return you to the recording screen.
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB) Adjusting the White Balance You can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is not produced by the selected white balance. 1 2 3 Press [WB]. Select the white balance and then press 4. ≥The adjustment screen is displayed. Adjust the coloring. 2: [A] (AMBER: ORANGE) 3: [G] (GREEN: GREENISH) 1: [B] (BLUE: BLUISH) 4: [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH) • You can also make adjustments in diagonal directions by using the joystick.
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB) 4 Confirm your selection. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. • When the white balance is adjusted, the color of its recording screen icon changes to the adjusted color. Adjusting toward the [G] side will display [+], while adjusting toward the [M] side will display [−].
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] [Photo Style] You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and expression styles. The image quality can be adjusted for each Photo Style. ¨[ ]/[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Photo Style] [Standard] The standard setting. [Vivid] A setting that produces a more vivid quality with higher saturation and contrast. [Natural] A setting that produces a softer quality with lower contrast. [L.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] [Flat] A setting that produces a flatter image quality with lower saturation and contrast. [Landscape] A setting suited for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens. [Portrait] A setting suited for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone. [Monochrome] A monochrome setting with no color shades. [L.Monochrome] A monochrome setting with rich gradation and crisp black accents. [L.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] [Like709] A setting that minimizes overexposure by applying a gamma curve correction equivalent to Rec.709 to perform compression (knee adjustment) of high-luminance areas. (ÎRecording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 360) • Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709”, a standard for high-definition broadcasting. [V-Log] A gamma curve setting intended for post-production processing.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] • In [iA] mode, operation differs from that in other recording modes. – [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set. – The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another recording mode or it is turned off. – Image quality cannot be adjusted.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] Adjusting Image Quality 1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style. 2 Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust. • Adjusted items are indicated with [¢]. 6WDQGDUG -5 3 Press ±0 ±0 ±0 ±0 ±0 0 or +5 . • When the image quality is adjusted, the Photo Style icon on the recording screen is indicated with [¢]. Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment) [Contrast] Adjusts the contrast in the image.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] [Hue] Assuming that the reference point is red, this rotates the hue toward violet/magenta or yellow/green to adjust the coloring of the entire image. [Filter Effect] [Yellow]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: weak) Records the sky with a clear blue. [Orange]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: medium) Records the sky with a darker blue. [Red]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: strong) Records the sky with a much darker blue.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] [Sensitivity]* Sets the ISO sensitivity. (ÎISO Sensitivity: 294) [White Balance]* Sets the white balance. (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 300) • While [WB] is selected, press [ Press [ ] to display the white balance setting screen. ] again to return to the original screen.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] • The items that you can adjust the image quality for depend on the Photo Style type. ([Saturation]) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ([Color Tone]) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3* S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 * Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] • The effects of [Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] cannot be checked on the recording screen.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style] Registering Settings in My Photo Style 1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style. 2 Adjust the image quality. • My Photo Style displays the types of Photo Style at the top of image quality adjustment. Select the base Photo Style. 3 Press [DISP.]. 4 (When [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10] is selected) Press 34 to select [Save Current Setting] and then press 5 or .
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings] [Filter Settings] ≥ [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]: 322 This mode records with additional image effects (filters). You can adjust the effect for each filter. In addition, you can simultaneously take pictures without effects. 1 Set the [Filter Effect].
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings] 2 Select the filter. ≥Press 34 to select, and then press or . ≥You can also select the image effect (filter) by touching the sample picture. • Press [DISP.] to switch the screen in the order of normal display and guide display. The guide display shows the description of each filter.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings] Adjusting the Filter Effect You can adjust the filter effect. 1 Select the filter. 2 On the recording screen, press [WB]. 3 Rotate , or to set. • To return to the recording screen, press [WB] again. • When the filter effect is adjusted, the filter icon on the recording screen is indicated with [¢].
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings] Setting a Filter with Touch Operation • The default settings are for the Touch Tab to not be displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. (Î[Touch Settings]: 558) 1 Touch [ 2 Touch the item to set. ].
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings] • White balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off). • The upper limit to ISO sensitivity is [3200]. • Depending on the filter, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed. • [Filter Effect] is not available when using the following function: – High Resolution mode • When displaying the [Filter Effect] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing [DISP.] displays the filter selection screen.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings] [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] You can simultaneously take pictures with no added filter effects. ¨[ ]/[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Filter Settings] ¨ Select [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] Settings: [ON]/[OFF] • [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] is not available when using the following functions: – Burst recording – [Time Lapse Shot] – [Stop Motion Animation] – [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.
Flash If you attach the Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional) to the hot shoe, you can record using the flash. You can also use a commercially available external flash by connecting a synchro cable to the flash synchro socket. Furthermore, by attaching an external flash that supports wireless flash recording, you can wirelessly control an external flash that is in a position separate from the camera. • Please also refer to the operating instructions for the Flash.
Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional) Using an External Flash (Optional) ≥ Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 325 • Remove the lens hood to prevent vignetting. • Flash recording is not possible when the following functions are being used: – [ELEC.
Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional) Removing the Hot Shoe Cover Before attaching the Flash (optional), remove the hot shoe cover. Refer to the operating instructions for the Flash for details about how to attach it. Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction indicated by arrow (2) while pressing it in the direction indicated by arrow (1).
Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional) Connecting a Synchro Cable to the Flash Synchro Socket You can use a commercially available external flash by connecting a synchro cable to the flash synchro socket. • Use an external flash with a synchronization voltage of 250 V or less. • Do not use the synchro cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more. 1 Rotate the flash synchro socket cap in the direction of the arrow to remove. • Be careful not to lose the flash synchro socket cap.
Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional) Notes on Flash Recording • Do not bring any object near the flash. Heat or light may cause the object to deform or discolor. • If you record repeatedly, time may be needed to charge the flash. While the flash is charging, images will be recorded without the flash firing. • When an external flash is attached, do not carry the camera by holding only the external flash. It may become detached.
Flash – Setting Flash Setting Flash ≥ [Flash Mode]: 329 ≥ [Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 332 ≥ [Flash Adjust.]: 334 ≥ [Flash Synchro]: 335 ≥ [Auto Exposure Comp.]: 336 You can set the flash function to control flash firing from the camera.
Flash – Setting Flash [Flash Mode] Sets the flash mode. ¨[ ]¨[ [ ] (Forced Flash On)/[ ] ¨ Select [Flash Mode] ] (Forced On/Red-Eye) The flash fires every time regardless of the recording conditions. This is suitable for recording when there is backlighting or under lighting such as fluorescent lighting. [ ] (Slow Sync.)/[ ] (Slow Sync.
Flash – Setting Flash • The flash fires twice. The interval between the first and second firings is longer when [ ] or [ is set. The subject should not move until the second firing has finished. •[ ] and [ ] cannot be used when the following are set: – [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL] – [Flash Synchro]: [2ND] – [Wireless]: [ON] • Some flash modes may not be available depending on the settings on the external flash. • The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies from person to person.
Flash – Setting Flash Available Flash Settings by Recording Mode The available flash settings depend on the recording mode. (3: Available, —: Not available) Recording mode •[ [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] ] [P]/[A] 3 3 3 3 3 [S]/[M] 3 3 — — 3 ] and [ ] can be set in [iA] mode. In [ ], the flash mode switches to one suited to the recording situation.
Flash – Setting Flash [Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.] You can select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually. • The settings made here are enabled when some flashes from other manufacturers are attached. Set on the flash when a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional) is attached. 1 Set the [Firing Mode]. ¨[ ≥ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Firing Mode] [TTL] Sets flash output to be set automatically by the camera. [MANUAL] Sets the flash output manually.
Flash – Setting Flash 2 3 (When set to [MANUAL]) Select [Manual Flash Adjust.] and then press or . Press 21 to set the flash output and then press . or • It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
Flash – Setting Flash [Flash Adjust.] You can adjust the flash output when taking pictures with the flash in TTL output mode. 1 2 Select [Flash Adjust.]. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Flash Adjust.] Press 21 to adjust the flash output and then press or . • It can be adjusted within the range of [−3 EV] to [+3 EV] in 1/3 EV steps. • [ ] is displayed on the recording screen. • For information about adjusting the flash output when recording using a wireless flash (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 341) • [Flash Adjust.
Flash – Setting Flash [Flash Synchro] When a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash, a trail of light may appear in front of the subject. If you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with a trail of light appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately before the shutter closes. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Flash Synchro] [1ST] This is the normal method for recording with the Flash.
Flash – Setting Flash [Auto Exposure Comp.] Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction with the exposure compensation value. (ÎExposure Compensation: 287) ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Auto Exposure Comp.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash Recording Using a Wireless Flash You can use a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional) to record using a wireless flash. You can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash attached to the hot shoe of the camera.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash Placing a Wireless Flash Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash • The placement range serves as a guide for when recording with the camera held horizontally. The range differs depending on the surrounding environment. • We recommend using a maximum of three wireless flashes in each group. • If the subject is too close, communication light may affect the exposure. You can reduce the effect by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or lowering the output with a diffuser or similar device.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash 3 Enable the wireless flash function of the camera. 4 Set [Wireless Channel]. 5 Set [Wireless Setup]. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Wireless] ¨ [ON] • Select the same channel as on the wireless flash side. • Set the firing mode and flash output. • When [Wireless] is set, [WL] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording screen.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash Setting Items ([Wireless Setup]) • To fire a test flash, press [DISP.]. [TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output. [AUTO]*2: Sets the flash output on the [Firing Mode] external flash side. [MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the external flash manually. [OFF]: The external flash outputs only [External communication light. Flash]*1 [Flash Adjust.] Adjusts the flash output of the external flash manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash [TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output. [AUTO]*1: Sets the flash output on the [Firing Mode] wireless flash side. [MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the wireless flash manually. [A Group]/ [OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified [B Group]/ group will not fire. [C Group] [Flash Adjust.] Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash [Wireless FP] The external flash performs FP firing (repeated high-speed firing of the flash) during wireless recording, enabling recording using the Flash even at fast shutter speeds. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Wireless FP] Settings: [ON]/[OFF] [Communication Light] Set the strength of communication light.
Video Settings This chapter describes the Creative Video mode, a recording mode especially for video, and settings available when recording videos.
Video Settings – Creative Video Mode Creative Video Mode ≥ Displays Suited to Video Recording: 346 ≥ Recording with Creative Video: 347 ≥ [CreativeVideo Combined Set.]: 351 The [ ] mode (Creative Video mode) is a recording mode specifically for video recording in which you can use all video functions. In the [ ] mode, the recording screen switch to displays suited to video recording. You can start and stop video recording with the shutter button.
Video Settings – Creative Video Mode Displays Suited to Video Recording In the recording screen, the following parts switch to displays suited to video recording. (1) (2) (3) MP4 FHD 420/8-L 59.94p 60 F2.8 ±0 FULL AFS 100 24m59s (4) (1) Recording file format (Î[Rec. File Format]: 134) (2) Recording quality (Î[Rec Quality]: 136) (3) Image area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 150) (4) Video recording time (ÎVideo Recording Time: 771) • Examples of displays at the time of purchase.
Video Settings – Creative Video Mode Recording with Creative Video 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Set the exposure mode. ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Exposure Mode] ¨ [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] • You can perform the same exposure operations as the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes. 3 Close the menu. 4 Start recording. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. ≥Press the shutter button (A), video rec. button (B), or sub video rec. button (C).
Video Settings – Creative Video Mode 5 Stop recording. ≥Press the shutter button, video rec. button, or sub video rec. button again.
Video Settings – Creative Video Mode Operations During Video Recording Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent operation sounds from being recorded. • With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. (Î[Touch Settings]: 558) 1 Touch [ 2 Touch an icon. ].
Video Settings – Creative Video Mode 3 Drag the slide bar to set the item. [ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly. [ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly. • If you touch icon (D), the screen of Step 2 is redisplayed.
Video Settings – Creative Video Mode [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] In default settings, settings such as exposure and white balance changed in [ ] mode are also reflected in picture recording in [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes. From the [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] menu, you can separate settings for video recording and for picture recording. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] [F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.
Video Settings – Creative Video Mode • The [iA] mode uses the optimum recording settings for the camera automatically, so the recording settings will be independent, irrespective of the settings made with this function.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video) Using AF (Video) ≥ [Continuous AF]: 353 ≥ [AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 355 ≥ [Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 356 [Continuous AF] You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Continuous AF] [MODE1] The camera continues to automatically focus only during recording. [MODE2] The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording standby and during recording. • This is available in [ ] mode.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video) • In the [iA] mode, the camera automatically keeps focusing during recording standby, irrespective of the [Continuous AF] setting. • Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, the AF operation sound may be recorded during video recording. If the operation sound bothers you, we recommend recording with [Continuous AF] set to [OFF]. • If the zoom is operated while recording videos, the subject may take a while to come into focus.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video) [AF Custom Setting(Video)] You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using [Continuous AF]. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [AF Custom Setting(Video)] [ON] Enables the following settings. [OFF] Disables the following settings. [AF Speed] [+] side: Focus moves at a faster speed. [−] side: Focus moves at a slower speed. [+] side: When the distance to the subject changes significantly, the camera [SET] [AF Sensitivity] immediately readjusts the focus.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video) [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] When the AF mode is [ ], [ ], or [ ], or when recording with MF, the focus point can be enlarged for display. (When the AF mode is [ ] or [ ], the center of the screen is enlarged for display.) The focus point can also be enlarged for checking when recording videos. • You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with [Enlarged Live Display(Video)].
Video Settings – Using AF (Video) • Depending on the lens used, the video enlarged display of live view screen may not be displayed. • During video recording using the following functions, the video enlarged display of live view screen cannot be displayed: – [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of 60.
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring Video Brightness and Coloring ≥ [Luminance Level]: 358 ≥ [Master Pedestal Level]: 359 ≥ Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 360 ≥ [ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 362 ≥ [Dynamic Range Boost]: 363 [Luminance Level] You can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording. You can set to [16-235] or [16-255], the standard for video, or to [0-255], which covers the entire range of luminance, the same as pictures.
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring [Master Pedestal Level] You can adjust the black level, which serves as the reference for images. 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Select [Master Pedestal Level]. 3 ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Master Pedestal Level] Adjust master pedestal. , ≥Rotate or . • Set in the range between −15 and +15.
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee) When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709], you can adjust the knee so that recording can be performed with minimal overexposure. 1 2 3 Set [Photo Style] to [Like709]. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Photo Style] ¨ [Like709] Press [Q]. Select a knee setting. ≥Press 21 to select a setting item.
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring [AUTO] Adjusts the compression levels of high-luminance areas automatically. [MANUAL] You can set the luminance where compression starts (knee master point) and the intensity of compression (knee master slope). Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust. [POINT]: Master knee point [SLOPE]: Master knee slope • Rotate to adjust the knee master point, and master slope. • Values within the following ranges can be set: – Master knee point: 80.
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring [ISO Sensitivity (video)] Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO]. 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Set [ISO Sensitivity (video)]. ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [ISO Sensitivity (video)] Setting Items ([ISO Sensitivity (video)]) [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring [Dynamic Range Boost] Outputs a signal with a wide dynamic range from the image sensor. This allows recording of video with a wider dynamic range. 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Set [Dynamic Range Boost] to [ON]. ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Dynamic Range Boost] ¨ [ON] •[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
Video Settings – Audio Settings Audio Settings ≥ [Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 365 ≥ [Mute Sound Input]: 366 ≥ [Sound Rec Gain Level]: 367 ≥ [Sound Rec Level Adj.
Video Settings – Audio Settings [Sound Rec Level Disp.] The sound recording level is displayed on the recording screen. ¨[ [ON] ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Sound Rec Level Disp.] Sound recording level displayed on the recording screen. [OFF] — Sets the display size of sound recording level. [SET] [Displaying Size] [LARGE]/[SMALL] • When [Sound Rec Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is fixed to [ON].
Video Settings – Audio Settings [Mute Sound Input] This mutes audio input. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Mute Sound Input] Settings: [ON]/[OFF] • [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
Video Settings – Audio Settings [Sound Rec Gain Level] This switches the gain of audio input. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Sound Rec Gain Level] [STANDARD] This is the standard input gain setting. (0 dB) [LOW] Audio input is reduced for recording in environments with loud noises. (−12 dB) • When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], the sound recording gain of CH3/CH4 can be adjusted.
Video Settings – Audio Settings [Sound Rec Level Adj.] Manually adjust the sound recording level. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Sound Rec Level Adj.] • Press 21 to adjust the sound recording level and then press or . Settings: [MUTE]/[−18dB] to [+12dB] • You can adjust by 1 dB increments. • This can also be set during video recording. • Displayed dB values are approximate. • When set to [MUTE], [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
Video Settings – Audio Settings [Sound Rec Quality] Sound quality for video can be set when the [Rec. File Format] is [MOV] or [Apple ProRes]. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Sound Rec Quality] [96kHz/24bit] Audio is recorded using 96kHz/24bit high resolution audio. • This can be set when an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), or Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) is connected.
Video Settings – Audio Settings [Sound Rec Level Limiter] The sound recording level is adjusted automatically to minimize sound distortion (crackling noise).
Video Settings – Audio Settings [Wind Noise Canceller] This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Wind Noise Canceller] [HIGH] This effectively reduces the wind noise by reducing the low-pitched sound when a strong wind is detected. [STANDARD] This reduces wind noise without loss of sound quality by filtering out only wind noise. [OFF] Turns the function off.
Video Settings – Audio Settings [Lens Noise Cut] When using a lens compatible with power zoom, this reduces the sounds made by the zoom when it operates during video recording. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Lens Noise Cut] Settings: [ON]/[OFF] • When this function is used, the sound quality may differ from that during normal operation.
Video Settings – Audio Settings [Audio Information] This screen enables you to view audio settings and the status of recording all at once. You can also touch the screen to change the settings. • The operations on the audio information display screen are the same as the control panel operations. (ÎControl Panel: 96) Press [ ]. • You can also display it by touching the audio display area on the control panel (Creative Video mode).
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional) External Microphones (Optional) ≥ Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional): 377 ≥ Reduction of Wind Noise: 378 With a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional), you can record higher-quality high resolution audio compared to the built-in microphone. • Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries. 1 Set the [Mic Socket] that suits the device to be connected.
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional) ([Mic Input (Plug-in Power)]) When connecting an external microphone that requires a power supply from the camera [MIC] socket. ([Mic Input]) When connecting an external microphone that does not require a power supply from the camera [MIC] socket. ([Line Input]) When connecting an external audio device for line output. • The setting will be fixed to [ ] when a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) is connected.
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional) 3 Connect the external microphone to the camera and then turn on the camera. • If mounting the external microphone on the camera hot shoe (A), remove the hot shoe cover. (ÎRemoving the Hot Shoe Cover: 325) (A) 4 Make settings for the sound quality of the audio to be recorded in [Sound Rec Quality] (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 369). • Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional) Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional) When using the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), you can set the microphone sound pickup range. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Special Mic.] [STEREO] Picks up sound over a wide area. [SHOTGUN] Helps prevent picking up background noise, and records sound from a specific direction.
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional) Reduction of Wind Noise This reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Wind Cut] Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF] • Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
Video Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional) XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional) ≥ [4ch Mic Input]: 381 By attaching an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), you can use a commercially available XLR microphone to enable the recording of superior-quality high-res audio and 4-channel audio. (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 381) (A) (B) (A) Hot shoe (B) Commercially available XLR microphone Getting started: • Turn off the camera, and remove the hot shoe cover.
Video Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional) 1 Attach the XLR Microphone Adaptor to the hot shoe, and then turn on the camera. ¨[ ≥ ]¨[ ] ¨ [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] • When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] automatically turns [ON]. [ON] Records audio using the XLR microphone. [OFF] Records audio using the built-in microphone of the camera. 2 Make settings for the sound quality of the audio to be recorded in [Sound Rec Quality] (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 369).
Video Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional) [4ch Mic Input] To record 4-channel audio, use a commercially available XLR microphone connected to an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) together with the built-in microphone. By combining a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or a Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) instead of using the built-in microphone, it is also possible to record 4-channel 96 kHz/24-bit high-resolution audio.
Video Settings – Headphones Headphones ≥ [Sound Monitoring Channel]: 384 You can record videos while monitoring their sound by connecting commercially available headphones to the camera. • Do not use the headphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more. • When headphones are connected, beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds are muted.
Video Settings – Headphones Switching the Sound Output Method ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Sound Output] [REALTIME] Audio without time lag. It may differ from the sound recorded in videos. [REC SOUND] Audio to be recorded in videos. Output sound may be delayed from actual sound.
Video Settings – Headphones [Sound Monitoring Channel] You can set the audio channel output to the headphones when recording. For information about the audio channel settings during playback (Î[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]: 599) ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Sound Monitoring Channel] [CH1/CH2] Outputs CH1 (L)/CH2 (R). [CH3/CH4] Outputs CH3 (L)/CH4 (R). [CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4] Outputs CH1+CH2 (L)/CH3+CH4 (R). [CH1] Outputs CH1. [CH2] Outputs CH2. [CH3] Outputs CH3. [CH4] Outputs CH4.
Video Settings – Headphones • This can also be set during video recording.
Video Settings – Time Code Time Code ≥ Setting the Time Code: 387 When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes], the time code is automatically recorded during video recording. If [MP4], the time code is not recorded.
Video Settings – Time Code Setting the Time Code Sets the recording, display, and output of the time code. 1 Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes]. 2 Select [Time Code]. ≥ ≥ ¨[ ProRes] ¨[ ]¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec. File Format] ¨ [MOV]/[Apple ] ¨ [Time Code] [Time Code Display] Displays the time code on the recording screen/playback screen.
Video Settings – Time Code [Time Code Value] [Reset]: Sets to 00:00:00:00 (hour: minute: second: frame) [Manual Input]: Manually input hour, minute, second and frame. [Current Time]: Sets hour, minute and second to current time and sets frame to 00. [Time Code Mode] [DF]: Drop Frame. The camera modifies the difference between recorded time and time code. • Seconds and frames are separated by “.”. (Example: 00:00:00.00) [NDF]: Non-Drop Frame. Records the time code without drop frame.
Video Settings – Time Code • When using the following functions, updating of the information display on the screen may get slower due to the load being placed on the internal processing in the camera, but this is not a malfunction and there will be no change to the images recorded: – [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of 60.
Video Settings – Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Device Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Device ≥ Preparations for Time Code Synchronization: 391 ≥ Synchronize the Time Code of the External Device with That of the Camera (TC OUT): 393 ≥ Synchronize the Time Code of the Camera with That of the External Device (TC IN): 395 Synchronize the time code default value with an external device that supports time code signal input and output.
Video Settings – Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Device Preparations for Time Code Synchronization When [Count Up] is set to [FREE RUN] in the [ ] mode, you can synchronize the initial value of the time code with an external device. 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Set [Count Up] to [FREE RUN]. 3 ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Time Code] ¨ [Count Up] ¨ [FREE RUN] Rotate the flash synchro socket cap in the direction of the arrow to remove.
Video Settings – Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Device 5 Connect the BNC conversion cable (for TC IN/OUT) and the external device with the BNC cable. • Do not use any other BNC conversion cables (for TC IN/OUT) except the supplied one. • Do not use the BNC cables with the length of 2.8 m (9.2 feet) or more. • We recommend using a 5C-FB equivalent double-shielded BNC cables.
Video Settings – Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Device Synchronize the Time Code of the External Device with That of the Camera (TC OUT) The initial time code value of the external device is synchronized according to the time code signal (LTC signal) of the camera. 1 2 Prepare for time code synchronizing. (ÎPreparations for Time Code Synchronization: 391) Select [TC Output Reference].
Video Settings – Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Device Outputting the Time Code Signal Again By setting as follows, the time code signal (LTC signal) can be output just by connecting with the external device with the BNC cable: ] mode •[ • [Count Up] ([Time Code]): [FREE RUN] • [TC Synchronization] ([External TC Setting] in [Time Code]): [TC OUT] 394
Video Settings – Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Device Synchronize the Time Code of the Camera with That of the External Device (TC IN) The initial time code value of the camera is synchronized according to the time code signal (LTC signal) of the external device. • In advance, change the [System Frequency] (Î[System Frequency]: 132), [Rec Quality] (Î[Rec Quality]: 136), and [Time Code Mode] (Î[Time Code Mode]: 388) to match the external device. 1 2 3 Prepare for time code synchronizing.
Video Settings – Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Device • When multiple units of this camera are synchronized, the time code and exposure timings are synchronized so you can match the timings for starting exposure between cameras. • The exposure timing can only be synchronized the first time after [TC Synchronization] is set to [TC IN].
Video Settings – Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Device Maintaining, Releasing, and Restoring the Slave State Even if you disconnect the BNC cable, the camera will remain in slave state. • Perform one of the following operations to release the camera from the slave state. – Operate the camera on/off switch – Switch the recording mode – Change the [System Frequency] – Set the [Variable Frame Rate] – Switch the [Rec Quality] between 239.76p/119.88p/59.94p/59.94i/29.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions Main Assist Functions ≥ [Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 399 ≥ [SS/Gain Operation]: 400 ≥ [WFM/Vector Scope]: 402 ≥ [Luminance Spot Meter]: 406 ≥ [Zebra Pattern]: 408 ≥ [Frame Marker]: 410 ≥ Color Bars/Test Tone: 412 • The [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu has display assist functions such as the center marker and safety zone marker: (Î[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 575) 398
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions [Flicker Decrease (Video)] The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the video. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Flicker Decrease (Video)] [1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120] [OFF] • This can be set when [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is [ON].
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions [SS/Gain Operation] You can switch the units of shutter speed values and gain (sensitivity) values. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [SS/Gain Operation] [SEC/ISO] Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in ISO. [ANGLE/ISO] Displays the shutter speed in degrees and the gain in ISO. • The angle can be set in a range between 11° and 357°.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions • When [SS/Gain Operation] is set to [SEC/dB], menu names change as shown below: – [ISO Sensitivity (video)] ¨ [Gain Setting] – [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] ¨ [Auto Gain Lower Limit Setting] – [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] ¨ [Auto Gain Upper Limit Setting] – [Extended ISO] ¨ [Extended Gain Setting] – [ISO Displayed Setting] ¨ [Gain Displayed Setting] 401
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions [WFM/Vector Scope] This displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording screen. You can change the size of the waveform display. 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Set [WFM/Vector Scope]. ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [WFM/Vector Scope] [WAVE] Displays a waveform. [VECTOR] Displays the vector scope.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions 3 Select the position to display. ≥Press 3421 to select and then press or . • Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick. • You can also move using touch operations. • You can rotate to change the size of the waveform. • To return the waveform or vector scope position back to the center, press [DISP.]. With waveform, pressing [DISP.] once again returns the size to the default setting.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions Screen Displays Waveform • The waveform displayed on the camera indicates the luminance as values based on the conversions below: 0 % (IRE*): Luminance value 16 (8 bit) 100 % (IRE*): Luminance value 235 (8 bit) * IRE: Institute of Radio Engineers (A) (B) (C) (F) (D) (E) (A) 109 % (IRE) (Dotted line) (B) 100 % (IRE) (C) 50 % (IRE) (D) 0 % (IRE) (E) −4 % (IRE) (Dotted line) (F) The range between 0 % and 100 % shows dotted lines at intervals of 10 %.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions Vector scope (G) (J) (H) (K) (I) (L) (G) R (Red) (H) YL (Yellow) (I) G (Green) (J) MG (Magenta) (K) B (Blue) (L) CY (Cyan) Display example) • You can also change the position by dragging on the recording screen. • The waveform and vector scope are not output through HDMI.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions [Luminance Spot Meter] Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small area. 1 2 Set [Luminance Spot Meter]. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Luminance Spot Meter] ¨ [ON] Select the position where you want to measure the luminance. ≥Press 3421 to select and then press or . • Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick. • You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording screen.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions Measurement Range Measuring is possible in the range −7 % to 109 % (IRE). • When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], this can be measured with “Stop” units.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions [Zebra Pattern] Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes. You can also set the base value and the breadth of the range so that the stripes are displayed on parts that are within the range of brightness you specify.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions ¨[ ]¨[ [ZEBRA1] [ZEBRA2] [ZEBRA1+2] ] ¨ Select [Zebra Pattern] Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with [ZEBRA1] stripes. Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with [ZEBRA2] stripes. Both [ZEBRA1] and [ZEBRA2] are displayed. [OFF] — Sets the base brightness.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions [Frame Marker] A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen. This allows you to see during recording the angle of view that will be achieved with trimming (cropping) in post-processing. ¨[ [ON] ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Frame Marker] Displays the Video Frame Marker on the recording screen. [OFF] — Sets the aspect ratio of the Video Frame [Frame Aspect] [SET] Marker. [2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[1.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions When [CUSTOM] Is Selected with [Frame Aspect] in [SET] You can freely set the aspect ratio of the frame. ≥ Press 3421 to move the center position. • Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick. • You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording screen. ≥ Set the height of the frame with [ ], and the width with [ • You can also pinch out/pinch in the frame to change the size.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions Color Bars/Test Tone The color bars are displayed on the recording screen. A test tone is output while the color bars are being displayed. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Color Bars] Settings: [SMPTE]/[EBU]/[ARIB] • To end the display, press .
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions Adjusting the Test Tone There are 4 levels ([−12dB], [−18dB], [−20dB], and [MUTE]) of test tone to select. Rotate , or to select the test tone level. • The color bars and test tone will be recorded on the video if video recording is started while the color bars are being displayed. • The brightness and coloring that appear on the camera’s monitor or viewfinder may differ from those that appear on another device such as an external monitor.
Special Video Recording This chapter describes advanced video recording applications such as slow motion/quick motion video and Log recording.
Special Video Recording – Variable Frame Rate Variable Frame Rate You can record smooth slow motion video and quick motion video by using a frame rate for recording that differs from the recording frame rate. Slow Motion Video (Overcrank Recording) Set a number of frames that is higher than the recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]. For example: When recording at 48 fps when set to a 24.00p [Rec Quality], the speed is halved.
Special Video Recording – Variable Frame Rate 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV]. 3 ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ¨[ ≥ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec. File Format] ¨ [MOV] Select a recording quality with which you can use [Variable Frame Rate] recording. ¨[ ≥ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec Quality] • Items with which you can use [Variable Frame Rate] are indicated as [VFR available].
Special Video Recording – Variable Frame Rate Available Frame Rate Setting Ranges The frame rate you can set differs depending on the [Rec Quality] settings. [Rec Quality] Frame rate C4K/4K video that uses the Long GOP image compression system 5.
Special Video Recording – Variable Frame Rate Shutter Speeds When Recording Variable Frame Rate Video When recording variable frame rate video, the minimum shutter speed changes depending on the set frame rate.
Special Video Recording – Variable Frame Rate • You can filter to show just the recording qualities where [Variable Frame Rate] can be used. (Î[Filtering]: 147) • We recommend using a tripod when recording images with [Variable Frame Rate]. • Focus mode switches to MF. (When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you cannot set focus with MF.) • The camera automatically focuses when [AF ON] is pressed, but only before starting recording.
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video High Frame Rate Video [MOV] video with high frame rates can be recorded to cards. By converting it with the compatible software, it is possible to produce slow motion video. AF recording and audio recording, not possible with [Variable Frame Rate], also become possible. 1 Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV]. 2 Select a recording quality for high frame rate video. ≥ ≥ ¨[ ¨[ ]¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec.
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video Recording Qualities for High Frame Rate Video [System Frequency] [Rec Quality] Recording frame rate [5.7K/48p/420/10-L] [4.4K/48p/420/10-L] [C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)] [C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)] [C4K/48p/422/10-L] [C4K/48p/420/10-L] [4K/48p/422/10-I(H)] 47.95p [4K/48p/422/10-I(L)] [4K/48p/422/10-L] [4K/48p/420/10-L] [59.94Hz (NTSC)] [FHD/48p/422/10-I] [FHD/48p/422/10-L] [FHD/48p/420/10-L] [C4K/120p/420/10-L] [4K/120p/420/10-L] [FHD/120p/422/10-I] 119.
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video [C4K/100p/420/10-L] [4K/100p/420/10-L] [FHD/100p/422/10-I] [50.00Hz (PAL)] 100.00p [FHD/100p/422/10-L] [FHD/100p/420/10-L] [FHD/200p/422/10-I] [FHD/200p/422/10-L] 200.00p [FHD/200p/420/10-L] [5.7K/48p/420/10-L] [4.4K/48p/420/10-L] 48.00p [C4K/120p/420/10-L] [24.00Hz (CINEMA)] [4K/120p/420/10-L] [FHD/120p/422/10-I] [FHD/120p/422/10-L] [FHD/120p/420/10-L] 422 120.
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video Shutter Speeds When Recording High Frame Rate Video When recording high frame rate video, the minimum shutter speed changes depending on the recording frame rate of the video. Minimum shutter speed Recording frame rate of the video 47.95p [AFS]/[AFC] [MF] 1/30 of a second 48.00p 1/25 of a second 100.00p 1/100 of a second 119.88p/120.00p 1/125 of a second 200.00p 1/200 of a second 239.
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video • When outputting via HDMI, the resolution and frame rate may be down-converted for output. (ÎSettings for Down-Converting: 465) • When [Dynamic Range Boost] is set to [ON], you cannot set a [Rec Quality] whose recording frame rate exceeds 60.00p. Notice regarding AF when recording high frame rate video • When set to a [Rec Quality] where the recording frame rate is 200.00p or more, there is a limitation on the lenses on which AF is possible.
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition] [Focus Transition] Smoothly transitions the focus position from the current position to a position registered in advance. 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Select [Focus Transition]. ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ¨[ ≥ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Focus Transition] • If the [Please set the focus position.] message is displayed, press either or .
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition] 3 Set focus positions. ≥Check the focus using the same procedure as MF (ÎRecord Using MF: 195), and then press [WB], [ISO], and [ ] to set focus positions. ≥You can also touch [POS1] to [POS3] to set focus positions. POS1 POS2 POS3 1 (m)∞ 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 4 Register the focus positions. 5 Start recording. ≥Press or to register the focus positions. ≥Press the video rec. button. • The advanced setting screen is displayed when you press [DISP.
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition] 6 Start Focus Transition. ≥Press 21 to select [1], [2], or [3], and then press or . • When [Focus Transition Wait] is set, Focus Transition starts after the set time has elapsed. 1 (m)∞ 1 0.5 0.3 (A) (B) 1 2 3 (A) Current focus position (B) Registered focus position 7 End Focus Transition. 8 Stop recording. ≥Press [Q]. ≥Press the video rec. button once again.
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition] Setting Items ([Focus Transition]) [Focus Position Setting] Registers focus positions. [Focus Transition Speed] Sets the moving speed of focus. • Moving speed: [SH] (fast) to [SL] (slow) [Focus Transition Rec] Starts Focus Transition when recording starts. • Select the position registered with [Focus Position Setting]. [Focus Transition Wait] Sets the wait time before the start of Focus Transition.
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition] • Maintain the same distance to the subject after setting focus positions. • The moving speed of focus varies depending on the lens being used. • The moving speed of focus slows as it approaches the closest focusing distance of the lens or infinity. • While using [Focus Transition], it is not possible to focus on anything other than one of the registered focus positions. • Any of the operations below will clear the focus position settings.
Special Video Recording – Log Recording Log Recording ≥ [V-Log View Assist]: 433 Setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log] enables Log recording. Images finished with rich gradation can be created through post-production processing. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Photo Style] ¨ Select [V-Log] 9 /RJ • Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table). You can download LUT data from the following support site: https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.
Special Video Recording – Log Recording Exposure When [V-Log] Is Set The [V-Log] curve characteristics comply with “V-Log/V-Gamut REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”. When set to [V-Log], the standard exposure when gray with a reflectance ratio of 18 % is imaged is IRE 42 %.
Special Video Recording – Log Recording • Latitude becomes “13+ Stop” when [Dynamic Range Boost] is set to [ON] and becomes “12+ Stop” when set to [OFF].
Special Video Recording – Log Recording [V-Log View Assist] When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], the recording screen and images output via HDMI will darken. Using [V-Log View Assist] means you can show images with LUT data applied on the monitor/viewfinder and output them via HDMI. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [V-Log View Assist] [Read LUT File] Reads LUT data from the card. [LUT Select] Selects the LUT data to be applied from among the preset ([Vlog_709]) and registered LUT data.
Special Video Recording – Log Recording Reading LUT Files • The following LUT data can be used: – The “.vlt” format, which meets the requirements specified in the “VARICAM 3DLUT REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0” – The “.cube” format • The “.cube” format LUT files are compatible with 17 point and 33 point 3D LUT. • The number of characters that can be used in a file name differs depending on the file system of the card.
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos HLG Videos ≥ [HLG View Assist]: 438 Record videos with the wide dynamic range of the HLG format. You can record in very bright light where overexposure can occur or in dark areas where underexposure can occur, maintaining the rich yet subtle colors you can see with your naked eye. You can view the video that you record by outputting via HDMI to devices (TVs, etc.) that support the HLG format, or playing back directly on supporting devices.
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos 1 2 Set the recording mode to [ ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) Select a recording quality with which you can record HLG video. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec Quality] • Items available for recording with HLG video are indicated as [HLG available]. • Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video (ÎList of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 449) 3 Set [Photo Style] to [Hybrid Log Gamma].
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos • The monitor and viewfinder on this camera do not support display of HLG format images. With [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu, you can display the images converted for monitoring on the monitor/ viewfinder of this camera. (Î[HLG View Assist]: 438) • HLG images are shown dark on devices that do not support the HLG format.
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos [HLG View Assist] At recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted color gamut and brightness on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs these over HDMI. ¨[ [HDMI] ]¨[ ] ¨ [HLG View Assist] ¨ [Monitor] or [AUTO]* Converts images before outputting them via HDMI while applying the effect of [MODE2]. This conversion setting works only when the camera is connected to a device that does not support HDR (HLG format).
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording Anamorphic Recording ≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 441 This camera can record video with a resolution of 5.8K/4.4K (anamorphic (4:3) video) that is compatible with anamorphic recording with an aspect ratio of 4:3. You can select a recording quality that suits anamorphic recording from a variety of different video formats (recording qualities).
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording 1 2 Set [Rec. File Format]. ¨[ ≥ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec. File Format] • When recording anamorphic (4:3) videos, set to [MOV]. Select a recording quality suited to anamorphic recording. ¨[ ≥ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec Quality] • The following recording qualities are available in [ ] mode: – [Rec Quality] exceeding a resolution of C4K – [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of 60.00p • When [Rec.
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] Display the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic lens on this camera. Using the [Frame Marker], it is also possible to superimpose on display the frame of the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing. 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Set [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]. ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ [ ] ([2.0×]) [ ] ([1.8×]) [ ] ([1.
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording 3 Set [Frame Marker]. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Frame Marker] (Î[Frame Marker]: 410) • Images output via HDMI are not desqueezed.
Special Video Recording – [Synchro Scan] [Synchro Scan] Fine-adjust the shutter speed to reduce flickering and horizontal stripes. The shutter speed set in Synchro Scan is saved separately from the shutter speed used for normal recording. In the Synchro Scan setting screen you can call up the current shutter speed for normal recording and adjust it. 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Set the exposure mode to [S] or [M]. 3 ]. ≥Set the mode dial.
Special Video Recording – [Synchro Scan] 4 Set the shutter speed. ≥Rotate or . , or to select a numeric value, then press • You can call up the current shutter speed for normal recording by pressing [DISP.]. • Adjust the shutter speed while looking at the screen so that flickering and horizontal stripes will be minimized. 60.1 ュリヴヱハ &XUUHQW VKXWWHU VSHHG • When you set [Synchro Scan] to [ON], the available shutter speed range becomes narrower.
Special Video Recording – [Loop Recording (video)] [Loop Recording (video)] Recording continues until the card becomes full, while dividing videos into short periods. When the card becomes full, recording continues while deleting the old data. This is a convenient function for recording over long periods that might exceed the capacity of the card.
Special Video Recording – [Loop Recording (video)] 1 Set the recording mode to [ 2 Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV]. 3 ]. ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec. File Format] ¨ [MOV] Set [Loop Recording (video)]. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Loop Recording (video)] ¨ [ON] •[ ] is displayed on the recording screen. • When the recording fills the card to capacity, loop recording starts and video recording time is no longer displayed.
Special Video Recording – [Loop Recording (video)] • Make sure the camera does not turn off during recording. • Loop recording cannot start if there is insufficient available capacity on the card. • When the recording time exceeds 12 hours, recording continues with data being deleted in order from the point where recording started. • When [Video File Name] is set to [CINE Style], recording stops when the number of folders and number of files reach the maximum.
Special Video Recording – [Segmented File Recording] [Segmented File Recording] To avoid video loss due to unforeseen interruptions to the power supply, recorded video is segmented at set intervals while being recorded. • The segmented videos are saved as one group image. (ÎGroup Images: 492) 1 Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes]. 2 Set [Segmented File Recording]. ≥ ≥ ¨[ ProRes] ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec. File Format] ¨ [MOV]/[Apple ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Segmented File Recording] ¨ [10MIN.]/ [5MIN.
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded VFR : Recording qualities that enable use of [Variable Frame Rate] HFR : Recording qualities for High Frame Rate video HLG : Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video : Recording qualities for anamorphic recording with an aspect ratio of 4:3 [Rec. File Format]: [MP4] [System Frequency]: [59.
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded [Rec. File Format]: [MOV] [System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)] [Rec Quality] VFR HFR HLG [5.8K/30p/420/10-L] 3 3 [5.8K/24p/420/10-L] 3 3 [5.7K/60p/420/10-L] 3 [5.7K/48p/420/10-L] 3 [5.7K/30p/420/10-L] 3 [5.7K/24p/420/10-L] 3 3 3 3 [4.4K/60p/420/10-L] 3 3 3 [4.
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded [4K/120p/420/10-L] 3 3 [4K/60p/422/10-I(H)] 3 [4K/60p/422/10-I(L)] 3 [4K/60p/422/10-L] [4K/60p/420/10-L] 3 3 3 [4K/48p/422/10-I(H)] 3 3 [4K/48p/422/10-I(L)] 3 3 [4K/48p/422/10-L] 3 3 [4K/48p/420/10-L] 3 [4K/30p/422/10-I] 3 3 3 [4K/30p/422/10-L] 3 [4K/30p/420/10-L] 3 3 [4K/24p/422/10-I] 3 3 [4K/24p/422/10-L] [4K/24p/420/10-L] 3 3 3 [FHD/240p/422/10-I] 3 3 [FHD/240p/422/10-L]
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded [FHD/48p/422/10-I] 3 3 [FHD/48p/422/10-L] 3 3 3 3 [FHD/48p/420/10-L] [FHD/30p/422/10-I] 3 [FHD/30p/422/10-L] 3 3 [FHD/30p/420/10-L] 3 3 [FHD/24p/422/10-I] 3 3 [FHD/24p/422/10-L] [FHD/24p/420/10-L] 3 3 452 3
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded [System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)] [Rec Quality] VFR HFR HLG [5.8K/25p/420/10-L] 3 [5.7K/50p/420/10-L] 3 [5.7K/25p/420/10-L] 3 3 [4.
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded [FHD/200p/422/10-I] 3 3 [FHD/200p/422/10-L] 3 3 [FHD/200p/420/10-L] 3 3 [FHD/100p/422/10-I] 3 3 [FHD/100p/422/10-L] 3 3 3 3 [FHD/100p/420/10-L] [FHD/50p/422/10-I] 3 [FHD/50p/422/10-L] [FHD/50p/420/10-L] 3 [FHD/50i/422/10-I] 3 3 [FHD/25p/422/10-L] [FHD/25p/420/10-L] 3 3 [FHD/50i/422/10-L] [FHD/25p/422/10-I] 3 3 3 3 3 454 3
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded [System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)] [Rec Quality] VFR HFR [5.8K/24p/420/10-L] 3 [5.7K/48p/420/10-L] [5.7K/24p/420/10-L] HLG 3 3 3 [4.
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded [Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes] [System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)] [Rec Quality] VFR HFR HLG [5.7K/30p/422 HQ] 3 [5.7K/30p/422] 3 [5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 3 [5.7K/24p/422] 3 [System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)] [Rec Quality] VFR HFR HLG [5.7K/25p/422 HQ] 3 [5.7K/25p/422] 3 [System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)] [Rec Quality] VFR HFR HLG [5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 3 [5.
HDMI Output (Video) You can record while outputting the camera images to an external monitor or external recorder connected with an HDMI cable. • HDMI output control differs between during recording and during playback.
HDMI Output (Video) – Connecting HDMI Devices Connecting HDMI Devices ≥ Attaching the Cable Holder: 459 • Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug. (Inserting at an angle can deform the terminal and cause malfunction.) • Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction. Getting started: • Turn off the camera and the external monitor/external recorder.
HDMI Output (Video) – Connecting HDMI Devices Attaching the Cable Holder Use of the supplied cable holder prevents detachment of the cable and damage to the terminals. • Put the camera on a stable surface to perform this task. 1 Open the door of the terminal section and slide the door into the part marked (D). (D) 2 Loosely mount the cable holder to the mount on the camera, and then rotate the screws in the direction of the arrows to secure the cable holder.
HDMI Output (Video) – Connecting HDMI Devices 3 4 5 Fit the USB connection cable and the HDMI cable to the clamp on the cable holder. Connect the USB connection cable to the USB port (F). Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI socket (G). (H) (F) (G) (H) Leave some slack so that this section has a length of at least 10 cm (0.33 feet). Removing the cable holder To remove the cable holder, follow the steps for attaching it in the reverse order.
HDMI Output (Video) – Connecting HDMI Devices Removing the clamp You can remove the clamp on the cable holder. While pushing (I), slide the clamp portion (J) of the cable holder to remove it. (J) (I) Adjusting the Monitor Angle You can adjust the angle of the monitor while it is tilted (ÎTilt: 71) by rotating it, without interfering with the connection cables. • Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. • We recommend using an HDMI cable with a thickness diameter of 6.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality HDMI Output Image Quality ≥ Images Output via HDMI: 462 ≥ Settings for Down-Converting: 465 Images Output via HDMI The images output via HDMI during recording differ depending on the recording mode. [ ] Mode Aspect ratio, resolution, and frame rate output is according to the [Rec Quality] settings in the [Video] ([Image Format]) menu. Resolution and frame rate can be down-converted for output according to the application.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality Resolution, frame rate • Resolution and frame rate output is according to the following menu combinations: – [Rec Quality] in the [Video] ([Image Format]) menu. – [Down Convert] in [HDMI Rec Output] in the [Custom] ([IN/OUT]) menu. • Video with a resolution exceeding 4K is output as C4K/4K resolution. • When set to a [Rec Quality] for high frame rate video, the resolution and frame rate may be down-converted for output.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality Notice Regarding HDMI Output • It may take some time for the output method to change. • When you use the HDMI output during recording, the image may be displayed with a time lag. • Beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds are muted during HDMI output.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality Settings for Down-Converting Make settings for the down-conversion of resolution for HDMI output in the [ ] mode. ¨[ ]¨[ Convert] ] ¨ [HDMI Rec Output] ¨ Select [Down [AUTO] Outputs by down-converting to match the connected device. [C4K/4K] Outputs by down-converting resolution to C4K/4K. [1080p] Down-converts resolution to FHD (1080), and outputs as progressive. [1080i] Down-converts resolution to FHD (1080), and outputs as interlaced.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality Image Quality When Outputting via HDMI Output is with the resolution and frame rate according to the combinations of the [Rec Quality] and [Down Convert] settings. • When [Down Convert] is set to [AUTO], the output matches the connected device. The maximum resolution and frame rate output when [AUTO] is set are the same as when [OFF] is selected. • There is no HDMI output when setting combinations result in a [—] in the below tables.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality [Down Convert] Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality] 1080/239.76p 1080/119.88p 1080/59.94p 1080/59.94i — [C4K/4K] — — [1080p] 1080/119.88p*3 1080/59.94p*2 — [1080i] 1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i [OFF] 1080/119.88p 1080/59.94p 1080/59.94i [Down Convert] Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality] 1080/47.95p 1080/23.98p 1080/29.97p [C4K/4K] — — [1080p] 1080/23.98p 1080/29.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality [System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)] [Down Convert] Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality] 5.8K/25.00p 4K/25.00p 4.4K/50.00p 4K/50.00p 5.7K/50.00p C4K/50.00p 5.7K/25.00p C4K/25.00p [C4K/4K] 4K/25.00p 4K/50.00p*2 C4K/50.00p*2, 4 C4K/25.00p*4 [1080p] 1080/25.00p*1 1080/50.00p*2 1080/50.00p*2 1080/25.00p*1 [1080i] 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i [OFF] 4K/25.00p 4K/50.00p C4K/50.00p C4K/25.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality [System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)] Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality] [Down Convert] 5.8K/24.00p 4.4K/48.00p 5.7K/48.00p 5.7K/24.00p C4K/24.00p [C4K/4K] 4K/24.00p C4K/24.00p*1 [1080p] 1080/24.00p 1080/24.00p 1080/24.00p [OFF] 4K/24.00p C4K/24.00p 1080/24.00p [Down Convert] C4K/120.00p Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality] 4K/120.00p 4K/24.00p [1080p] 1080/24.00p 1080/24.00p [OFF] 1080/24.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings HDMI Output Settings ≥ Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI: 471 ≥ Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder: 472 ≥ Outputting Audio via HDMI: 473 ≥ Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI: 473 470
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI Output the camera information display to an external device connected by HDMI. ¨[ Display] ]¨[ ] ¨ [HDMI Rec Output] ¨ Select [Info Settings: [ON]/[OFF] • There are the following restrictions when connected via HDMI and [Info Display] is set to [ON]: – Information is not displayed on the recording screen of the camera. – [Touch Tab] is not available.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder Recording start and stop control information is output to an external recorder connected by HDMI. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [HDMI Rec Output] ¨ Select [HDMI Recording Control] Settings: [ON]/[OFF] • [HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to [ON] in [ ] mode. (Î[HDMI Time Code Output]: 388) • Control information is output when pressing the video rec.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings Outputting Audio via HDMI Output audio to an external device connected by HDMI. ¨[ ]¨[ Output (HDMI)] ] ¨ [HDMI Rec Output] ¨ Select [Sound Settings: [ON]/[OFF] Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI Output the enlarged screens from [MF Assist] or [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] to an external device connected by HDMI.
Playing Back and Editing of Images This chapter explains how to play back and delete pictures and videos. • Images recorded on devices other than this one may not be played back or edited correctly on this camera.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures Playing Back Pictures 1 Display the playback screen. 2 Select a picture. ≥Press [ ]. ≥Select the pictures by pressing 21. ≥You can move continuously through images by pressing and holding 21. ≥You can also select by rotating or . ≥You can also move through images by dragging the screen horizontally.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures 3 Stop playback. ≥Press the shutter button halfway. ≥You can also stop playback by pressing [ ]. Switching the Card to Display You can switch the card displayed just by pressing [ ] during playback. • You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Card Slot Change]. (ÎFn Buttons: 517) 1 Press [ 2 Press 34 to select [Card Slot 1(CFexpress)] or [Card Slot 2(SD)] and then press ]. or .
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos Playing Back Videos ≥ Video Repeat Playback: 481 ≥ Extracting a Picture: 483 ≥ [Video Divide]: 484 1 Display the playback screen. 2 Select a video. ≥Press [ ]. • For information about how to select images (ÎPlaying Back Pictures: 475) • The [ ] video icon is displayed for a video. • The video recording time is displayed on the screen.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos 3 Play back the video. ≥Press 3. ≥You can also start playback by touching [ screen. 00:05:50 (B) 00:08:30 (C) (B) Elapsed playback time 4 (C) Playback bar Stop playback. ≥Press 4.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos Operations During Video Playback Button Touch operations operations 3 / 4 — Description of operation Plays/pauses. Stops. Performs fast-rewind playback. • If you press 2 again, the fast-rewind speed 2 — increases. Performs frame-by-frame rewinding (while paused). Performs fast-forward playback. • If you press 1 again, the fast-forward speed 1 — increases. Performs frame-by-frame forwarding (while paused).
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos • The camera can play back videos in MP4, MOV, and Apple ProRes formats. • The videos in the PRIVATE folder that were recorded with [Video File Name] set to [CINE Style] are also played back. • Video recorded with a [System Frequency] setting that is different to the current one cannot be played back. • If the reading speed of the card is slow, playback may pause or it may not be possible to play back smoothly.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos Video Repeat Playback You can play back a part of a video repeatedly. 1 Display the screen for setting the part to repeat. 2 Set the position to start the repeat. 3 ≥Press [Q] while paused. ≥The screen for setting the part to repeat is also displayed when you touch [Repeat Playback] while paused. ≥Press 21 to select the start position and then press or . ≥Selection is also possible by rotating , or .
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos 4 Start playback. • The operations during repeat playback are the same as “Operations During Video Playback”. (ÎOperations During Video Playback: 479) • End repeat playback by pressing 4 to stop playback or by pressing [Q] while paused. • Repeat playback is not possible if the recording time is short. • The positions set for the repeated part may shift from the position where the video is paused.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos Extracting a Picture Extract one frame of a video and save it as a JPEG image. 1 Pause playback at the position you wish to extract a picture. ≥Press 3. • To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward frame-by-frame). 00:06:10 2 00:08:30 Save the picture. ≥Press or . ≥You can also save the picture by touching [Save]. • The picture created from the video is saved with a [FINE] picture quality.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos [Video Divide] Divide a recorded video into two. • Images cannot be returned to their original state once they have been divided. Carefully confirm the images before performing the divide operation. • Do not remove the card or battery from the camera during the divide process. The images may be lost. 1 Select [Video Divide]. 2 Select and play the image. 3 ¨[ ≥ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Video Divide] ≥Press 21 to select an image and then press or .
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos 4 Divide the video. ≥Press or . ≥You can also divide the video by touching [Divide]. • It is not possible to divide video that was recorded when [Rec. File Format] was [Apple ProRes]. • Dividing the video at a point close to the start or end may not be possible. • Videos with a short recording time cannot be divided. • [Video Divide] cannot be used on images recorded using [Segmented File Recording].
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode Switching the Display Mode ≥ Enlarged Display: 487 ≥ Thumbnail Screen: 489 ≥ Calendar Playback: 491 You can use features to do things like enlarge recorded images for display and switch to thumbnail display to display multiple images at once (multi-playback). You can also switch to calendar display to show images of a selected recording date.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode Enlarged Display Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom). Enlarging the playback screen. ≥ Rotate to the right. ≥ The playback screen is enlarged in the order of 2× 16×. 4× 8× • Rotating to the left returns to the previous display size. • Enlarged display to 16× is not possible with FHD video or with pictures extracted from FHD video. 2.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode Operations During Enlarged Display Button Touch operations operations — — Pinch out/ pinch in Description of operation Enlarges/reduces the screen. Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps. Moves the enlarged display position. 3421 Drag Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick. / — Forwards or rewinds images while maintaining the same zoom magnification and zoom position.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode Thumbnail Screen 1 Switch to thumbnail display. ≥Rotate to the left. ≥The display is switched in the order of 12-image screen 30-image screen. • Rotating to the left during 30-image screen display switches to calendar display. (ÎCalendar Playback: 491) • Rotating to the right returns to the previous display. • You can also switch the display by touching an icon.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode • When you press [ ] while a thumbnail is being displayed, you can switch to the card being displayed. • You can scroll the screen by dragging the thumbnail display up or down. • Images indicated with [ ] cannot be played back.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode Calendar Playback 1 Switch to calendar playback. ≥Rotate to the left. ≥The display is switched in the order of thumbnail screen (12 images) Thumbnail screen (30 images) Calendar playback. • Rotating to the right returns to the previous display. SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT 2022 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 Select the recording date.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images Group Images Images recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Shooting are handled as group images in the camera, and can be deleted and edited on a group basis. (For example, if you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted.) You can also delete and edit each image in a group individually. Images Handled as Group Images by the Camera 1/999 SLF Group images recorded with SH burst recording.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images Playing and Editing the Images in a Group One by One Operations such as displaying thumbnails and deleting images are available with images in groups just as with normal playback. 1 Select the group image in the playback state. (ÎPlaying Back Pictures: 475) 2 Press 4 to display the images in the group. 3 Press 21 to select an image. • You can also perform the same operation by touching the group image icon.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images Deleting Images • Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the images before deletion. • You can only delete the images in the card of the selected card slot. • If you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted. 1 Press [ ] in playback state.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images 2 Press 34 to select the deletion method and then press or . [Delete Single] Deletes the selected image. [Delete Multi] Selecting and deleting multiple images. 1 Press 3421 to select the image to delete and then press or • [ ] is displayed for the selected image. • If you press or again, the selection is canceled. • Up to 100 images can be selected. 2 Press [DISP.] to delete the selected image.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing] [RAW Processing] This processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves them in JPEG format. 1 Select [RAW Processing]. 2 Select the RAW image. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [RAW Processing] ≥Press 21 to select an image and then press or . • When group images are selected, press 4 and then select an image in the group. Press 4 again to return to the normal selection screen.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing] 3 Select a setting item. 4 Change the setting. ≥Press 34 to select an item and then press , ≥Rotate , or or . . • The image can be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the screen. DISP. -2 5 -1 0 +1 +2 Confirm the setting. ≥Press or . ≥The screen of Step reappears. To set another item, repeat Steps 3 497 3 to 5.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing] 6 Save the image. ≥Press 34 to select [Begin Processing] and then press .
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing] Setting Items ([RAW Processing]) [Begin Processing] Saves the image. [White Balance] Selects and adjusts the white balance. Selecting the item with [ ] enables processing with the same setting as at the time of recording. • If you press 4 in the [White Balance] selection screen, the white balance adjustment screen appears.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing] [Highlight] Adjusts the brightness of bright portions. [Shadow] Adjusts the brightness of dark portions. [Saturation]/[Color Tone] Adjusts the saturation or color tone. [Hue] Adjusts the hue. [Filter Effect] Selects filter effects. [Grain Effect] Selects a grain effect setting. • You cannot set this for images recorded in High Resolution mode. [Color Noise] Adds color to the grain effect. [Noise Reduction] Sets noise reduction.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing] • The items that can be adjusted depend on the selected [Photo Style]. ([Saturation]) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ([Color Tone]) 3 3 3 3 3 3 * 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 * Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing] Displaying a Comparison Screen You can change a setting while checking the effect by displaying images with the applied setting value side by side. 1 Press [DISP.] in the screen of Step 4. • The image with the current setting (A) is displayed at the center. • Touching the image with the current setting enlarges it. Touching [ ] returns to the original display.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing] • It may take a while for the comparison screen to be displayed. • RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [L] size of [4:3]. (However, RAW images recorded in High Resolution mode are recorded in the [XL] size of [4:3]) • With this function, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle of view of [Ex. Tele Conv.] from the time of recording. • [Picture Quality] is processed as [FINE] with this function.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [Playback] Menu ≥ How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 504 ≥ [Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 506 ≥ [Playback] ([Process Image]): 509 ≥ [Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]): 510 ≥ [Playback] ([Edit Image]): 511 ≥ [Playback] ([Others]): 515 How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu Follow the steps below when the image selection screen is displayed. • Images are displayed separately by card slot.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu When [Multi] Has Been Selected When you press [ 1 ], the card that is displayed is switched. Press 3421 to select the image and then press • The setting is canceled when 1 2 3 4 5 6 ュリヴヱハ 2 or or (repeat). is pressed again. 2. Press [DISP.] to execute. When [Protect] is selected Press 3421 to select the image, and then press • The setting is canceled when 1 2 3 4 5 6 or or is pressed again. 6HW &DQFHO 505 to set (repeat).
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [Playback] ([Playback Mode]) `: Default settings [Playback Mode] `[Normal Play] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating] Filters the type of images to play back. • When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to display, then press [DISP.]. [Slide Show] [All] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating] Selects image types and plays them back at regular intervals in order.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [Rotate Disp.] `[ON] / [OFF] Automatically displays pictures vertically if they were recorded when holding the camera vertically. [Picture Sort] [FILE NAME] / `[DATE/TIME] This sets the order in which the camera displays images during playback. [FILE NAME]: Displays images by folder name/file name. [DATE/TIME]: Displays images by recording date.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] [MODE1] / `[MODE2] / [OFF] At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and brightness for display. • This functions in tandem with [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [Playback] ([Process Image]) [RAW Processing] Processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves them in JPEG format. (Î[RAW Processing]: 496) [Time Lapse Video] This creates videos from group images recorded with [Time Lapse Shot]. 1 Press 21 to select a [Time Lapse Shot] group and then press 2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video. or .
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]) [Protect] [Single] / [Multi] / [Cancel] You can set protection for images so that they will not be deleted by mistake. However, if you format the card, the protected images will also be deleted. • For information about how to select images (ÎHow to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 504) • Be careful because the [Protect] setting may be disabled on a device other than this camera.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [Playback] ([Edit Image]) `: Default settings [Resize] [Single] / [Multi] Reduce the picture size of JPEG images and save them as different images to enable them to be easily used for web pages or sent as email attachments. • For information about how to select images (ÎHow to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 504) – When [Single] is selected, after choosing the image, press 34 to select the size, then press or .
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [Rotate] Rotate images manually in 90o steps. [ ]: Rotates 90o clockwise. [ ]: Rotates 90o counter-clockwise. • For information about how to select images (ÎHow to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 504) • When [Rotate Disp.] is [OFF], [Rotate] is not available. [Video Divide] Divide a recorded video into two.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [Copy] `[ [Copy Direction] ]/[ ] [Select Copy] / [Copy All in Folder] / [Copy All in Card] You can copy the images in one of the cards to the other card. • Copied images will be saved in a new folder. [Select Copy]: Copies selected images. 1 Select the copy origin folder (DCIM folder/PRIVATE folder (CINE Style)). 2 Select the folder containing the images to copy. 3 Select the images.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu • If the copy source is a PRIVATE folder, only [Create a New Folder] can be selected. • You can set up to 100 images at once with [Select Copy]. • The [Protect] setting is not copied. • Copying may take a while.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu [Playback] ([Others]) `: Default settings [Delete Confirmation] ["Yes" first] / `["No" first] This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting an image is displayed. ["Yes" first]: [Yes] is highlighted first. ["No" first]: [No] is highlighted first. [Delete All Images] `[Card Slot 1(CFexpress)] / [Card Slot 2(SD)] Deleting all images in a card.
Camera Customization This chapter describes the customization function with which you can configure the camera to your preferred settings. It also describes the [Custom] menu where you can make advanced settings for the camera operations and screen displays, and the [Setup] menu where you can make basic settings for the camera.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons Fn Buttons ≥ Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 520 ≥ Use the Fn Buttons: 531 You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons. Additionally, you can register other functions to specialized buttons such as [WB] button, in the same way as with the Fn buttons. Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons Fn buttons (1) [Setting in REC mode] Sub video rec. button [Video Record] [Setting in PLAY mode] [Video Record] [Enlarged Live (2) [Fn2] (3) [Fn3] [Preview] (4) [WB] [White Balance] [No Setting] (5) [ISO] [Sensitivity] [No Setting] [ [Exposure Comp.] [No Setting] [Audio Information] [No Setting] [LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/Monitor Switch] [Video Record] [Video Record] [AF Mode] [Card Slot Change] [AF-ON] [Rating¿3] [Q.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons Fn4 Fn5 Fn6 Fn7 OFF Fn8 OFF (14) (15) Fn buttons (14) (16) [Setting in REC mode] [Fn4] [Wi-Fi] [Fn5] [Histogram] [Fn6] [Boost I.S. (Video)] [Fn7] [No Setting] [Fn8] [No Setting] [Fn9] [Fn10] (15) [Fn11] • Cannot be used as Fn [No Setting] [Fn12] [Fn13] [Fn14] (16) [Fn15] [Setting in PLAY mode] [No Setting] [Fn16] [Fn17] 519 buttons during playback.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons Register Functions to the Fn Buttons • With default settings, [Fn9] to [Fn13] on the joystick cannot be used. When using functions, set the [Joystick Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu to [Fn]. (Î[Joystick Setting]: 563) 1 Select [Fn Button Set]. 2 Select the button. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Fn Button Set] ¨ [Setting in REC mode]/ [Setting in PLAY mode] ≥Press 34 to select the button and then press ≥Selection is also possible by rotating or . • Press [DISP.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons 3 Find the function to register. 4 Register the function. ≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is categorized (ÎSetting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC mode]): 523, Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY mode]): 529) and then press or . ≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing 34 or rotating , and then pressing 1. ≥Switch the [1] to [3] tabs by pressing [Q].
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons • You can also touch [ Fn ] on the control panel (ÎControl Panel: 715) to display the screen in Step 2. • You can also press and hold the Fn button (2 sec.) to display the screen in Step 4. (This may not be displayed depending on the registered function and on the button type.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC mode]) [1] tab [Image Quality] • [Exposure Comp.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons [Focus/Shutter] • [AF Mode] (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 167) • [AF Detection Setting] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 170) • [Detecting Subject] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 170) • [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] (Î[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 160) • [AF Custom Setting(Video)] (Î[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 355) • [Focus Limiter] (Î[Focus Limiter]: 163) • [Focus Limiter Range Set] (Î[Focus Limiter]: 163) • [Focus Peaking] (Î[Focus Peaking]: 202) • [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] (Î[Focus Peaking]: 20
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons [Others (Photo)] • [Drive Mode Setting] (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 210) • [Bracketing] (ÎBracket Recording: 242) • [Silent Mode] (Î[Silent Mode]: 250) • [Image Stabilizer] (Î[Operation Mode]: 264) • [Shutter Type] (Î[Shutter Type]: 252) • [Ex. Tele Conv.] (ÎExtended Tele Conversion: 206) [2] tab [Image Format] • [Rec. File Format] (Î[Rec.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons [Others (Video)] • [Image Stabilizer] (Î[Operation Mode]: 264) • [E-Stabilization (Video)] (Î[E-Stabilization (Video)]: 262) • [Boost I.S. (Video)] (Î[Boost I.S. (Video)]: 262) • [Image Area of Video] (Î[Image Area of Video]: 150) • [Focus Transition] (Î[Focus Transition]: 425) [Operation] • [Q.MENU] (ÎQuick Menu: 94) • [Rec / Playback Switch] – Switches to the playback screen.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons [Monitor / Display] • [Preview] (ÎPreview Mode: 285) • [Preview Aperture Effect] – The aperture effect can be previewed while the Fn button is being pressed.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons [3] tab [Lens / Others] • [Focus Ring Control] (Î[Focus Ring Control]: 583) • [Zoom Control] (ÎInterchangeable lens that supports power zoom (electronic zoom): 205) • [Step Zoom] (Î[Step Zoom]: 208) • [Zoom Speed] (Î[Zoom Speed]: 208) • [Lens Information] (Î[Lens Information]: 266) [Card/File] • [Destination Card Slot] – Changes the priority of cards for recording. This can be used if [Double Card Slot Function] (Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 587) is set to [Relay Rec].
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY mode]) [1] tab [Playback Mode] • [Magnify from AF Point] (Î[Magnify from AF Point]: 507) • [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 507) • [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 508) • [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 441) [Process Image] • [RAW Processing] (Î[RAW Processing]: 496) [Add/Delete Info.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons [Monitor / Display] • [Night Mode] (Î[Night Mode]: 568) [Card/File] • [Card Slot Change] (ÎSwitching the Card to Display: 476) [IN/OUT] • [Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)] • [Wi-Fi] (ÎWi-Fi / Bluetooth: 624) • [Fan Mode] (Î[Fan Mode]: 580) • [Send Image (Smartphone)] (ÎSending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple Operations: 640) • [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 433) • [HLG View Assist (HDMI)] (Î[HLG View Assist]: 438) [2] tab [Others] • [N
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons Use the Fn Buttons During recording, pressing the Fn buttons enables usage of the functions registered in [Setting in REC mode], and during playback, usage of the functions registered in [Setting in PLAY mode]. 1 2 Press the Fn button. Select a setting item. ≥Press 21 to select a setting item and then press ≥Selection is also possible by rotating , or or . . • Display and selection methods of a setting item differ depending on the menu item.
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch] [Dial Operation Switch] ≥ Register Functions to the Dials: 532 ≥ Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 534 This temporarily changes the functions operated with (rear dial). (front dial) and Register Functions to the Dials 1 Select [Dial Operation Switch Setup]. ≥ ¨[ 2 ¨[ ]/[ ]¨[ ] ] ¨ [Dial Set.] ¨ [Dial Operation Switch Setup] Register the function. ≥Press 34 to select a function and then press 532 or .
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch] Functions That Can Be Registered • [Exposure Comp.] (ÎExposure Compensation: 287) • [Sensitivity]*1 (ÎISO Sensitivity: 294) • [White Balance]*2 (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 300) • [Photo Style] (Î[Photo Style]: 307) • [Aspect Ratio] (Î[Aspect Ratio]: 120) • [Filter Effect] (Î[Filter Settings]: 317) • [AF Mode] (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 167) • [Flash Mode] (Î[Flash Mode]: 329) • [Flash Adjust.] (Î[Flash Adjust.
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch] Temporarily Change Dial Operation 1 2 Set [Dial Operation Switch] to the Fn button. (ÎFn Buttons: 517) Switch dial operation. 1 ≥Press the Fn button set in Step . ≥A guide will display the functions registered to and • If no operations are performed, then several seconds later, the guide disappears. WB ISO 3 Set the registered function. ≥Rotate or while the guide is displayed. ISO WB 4 AWB AWBc AWBw Confirm your selection.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization Quick Menu Customization ≥ Register to the Quick Menu: 535 You can change Quick menu items depending on the recording mode. Additionally, you can change the items to display on the Quick menu and their order to suit your preferences. For information about Quick menu operation methods (ÎQuick Menu: 94) Register to the Quick Menu Change the menus to be displayed in the Quick menu.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization 3 Find the function to register. 4 Register menu items. ≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is categorized (ÎMenu Items That Can Be Registered: 537) and then press or . ≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing 34 or rotating , and then pressing 1. ≥Each press of [Q] switches between tabs [1] and [2].
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization Menu Items That Can Be Registered [1] tab [Image Quality] • [Exposure Comp.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization [Flash] • [Flash Mode] (Î[Flash Mode]: 329) • [Flash Adjust.] (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 334) • [Wireless Flash Setup] (ÎRecording Using a Wireless Flash: 337) [Others (Photo)] • [Drive Mode Setting] (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 210) • [Bracketing] (ÎBracket Recording: 242) • [Silent Mode] (Î[Silent Mode]: 250) • [Image Stabilizer] (Î[Operation Mode]: 264) • [Shutter Type] (Î[Shutter Type]: 252) • [Ex. Tele Conv.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization [Others (Video)] • [Image Stabilizer] (Î[Operation Mode]: 264) • [E-Stabilization (Video)] (Î[E-Stabilization (Video)]: 262) • [Boost I.S. (Video)] (Î[Boost I.S.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization [Lens / Others] • [Focus Ring Control] (Î[Focus Ring Control]: 583) • [Step Zoom] (Î[Step Zoom]: 208) • [Zoom Speed] (Î[Zoom Speed]: 208) • [Lens Information] (Î[Lens Information]: 266) [Card/File] • [Destination Card Slot] (ÎSwitching the Card to Display: 476) [IN/OUT] • [Wi-Fi] (ÎWi-Fi / Bluetooth: 624) • [Fan Mode] (Î[Fan Mode]: 580) [Others] • [No Setting] – Set when not using.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization Quick Menu Detailed Settings Change the appearance of the Quick menu and the operation of during menu display. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Q.MENU Settings] [Layout Style] Changes the appearance of the Quick menu. [MODE1]: Displays the live view and the menu simultaneously. [MODE2]: Displays the menu in full screen. [Front Dial Assignment] Changes the operation of in the Quick menu. [Item]: Selects menu items. [Value]: Selects setting values.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode Custom Mode ≥ Register in Custom Mode: 543 ≥ Using Custom Mode: 545 ≥ Calling Up Settings: 546 Recording modes and menu settings that match your preferences can be registered in Custom mode. You can use registered settings by switching the mode dial to [C1] to [C4] modes.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode Register in Custom Mode You can register the currently set information of the camera. At the time of purchase, the default settings of the [P] mode menus are registered with all Custom modes. 1 2 3 Set to recording mode and menu settings of the state you wish to save. Select [Save to Custom Mode]. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Save to Custom Mode] Register. ≥Select the save-to number and then press or . • A confirmation screen will be displayed. Press [DISP.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode Custom Mode Detailed Settings You can create additional Custom mode sets, and how long to retain temporarily changed settings details. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ Select [Custom Mode Settings] [Limit No. of Custom Mode] Sets the number of Custom modes that can be registered in [C4]. A maximum of 10 sets can be registered; 3 sets are available as default settings. [Edit Title] Changes the Custom mode name. A maximum of 22 characters can be entered.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode Using Custom Mode Set the recording mode to [C1] to [C4]. ≥ Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ If [C4], the last-used Custom mode will be called up. [C4] Custom Mode Selection 1 Set the recording mode to [C4]. 2 Press . • The Custom mode selection menu appears. 3 Press 34 to select the Custom mode and then press or . • The selected Custom mode icon will be displayed on the recording screen.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode Calling Up Settings Call up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode and overwrite the current settings with these. 1 Set to the recording mode to be used. 2 Select [Load Custom Mode]. 3 ≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Load Custom Mode] Select the Custom mode to call up. ≥Select the Custom mode and then press or .
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Custom] Menu ≥ [Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 548 ≥ [Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 552 ≥ [Custom] menu ([Operation]): 558 ≥ [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]): 565 ≥ [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 575 ≥ [Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 579 ≥ [Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 581 547
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Custom] menu ([Image Quality]) `: Default settings [Photo Style Settings] [Vivid] / [Natural] / [L.ClassicNeo] / [Flat] / [Landscape] / [Portrait] / [L.Monochrome] / [L.Monochrome D] / [Show/Hide Photo Style] [L.Monochrome S] / [Cinelike D2] / [Cinelike V2] / [Like709] / [V-Log] / [Hybrid Log Gamma] / [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10] Sets Photo Style items to be displayed on the menu.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Extended ISO] [ON] / `[OFF] Setting of ISO sensitivity to a minimum of [ISO50] is possible. [Exposure Offset Adjust.] [Multi Metering] [−1EV] to [+1EV] (`[±0EV]) [Center Weighted] [−1EV] to [+1EV] (`[±0EV]) [Spot] [−1EV] to [+1EV] (`[±0EV]) [Highlight Weighted] [−1EV] to [+1EV] (`[±0EV]) Adjusts the exposure level that is the standard exposure for each setting item of [Metering Mode].
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Color Space] `[sRGB] / [AdobeRGB] This sets the method for correcting the color reproduction of the recorded images on the screens of a PC or on a device such as a printer. [sRGB]: This is widely used in PCs and similar devices. [AdobeRGB]: AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB. • Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] [F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.] `[ ]/[ ] [White Balance] `[ ]/[ ] [Photo Style] `[ ]/[ ] [Metering Mode] `[ ]/[ ] [AF Mode] `[ ]/[ ] Content set in [ ] mode can be separated from when taking pictures. (Î[CreativeVideo Combined Set.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]) `: Default settings [Focus/Shutter Priority] [AFS] `[FOCUS] / [BALANCE] / [RELEASE] [AFC] [FOCUS] / `[BALANCE] / [RELEASE] This sets whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during AF. [FOCUS]: Disables recording when focus is not achieved. [BALANCE]: Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing and shutter release timing. [RELEASE]: Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [AF+MF] [ON] / `[OFF] When the focus mode is set to [AFS], you can fine-adjust the focus manually during AF Lock.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Focus Ring Lock] [ON] / `[OFF] This disables the focus ring operation during MF to lock the focus. • [MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the focus ring is locked. [Show/Hide AF Mode] [Tracking] `[ON] / [OFF] [Full Area AF] `[ON] / [OFF] [Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] `[ON] / [OFF] [Zone] `[ON] / [OFF] [1-Area+] `[ON] / [OFF] [Pinpoint] `[ON] / [OFF] Sets the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Shutter AF] `[ON] / [OFF] This adjusts focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway. [Eye Detection Display] `[ON] / [OFF] When set to [OFF], you can make the cross for eye/face detection disappear when focus is aligned by pressing the shutter button halfway, etc. [Half-Press Shutter] [ON] / `[OFF] You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter button halfway.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Quick AF] [ON] / `[OFF] When the amount of camera shake becomes small, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter button is pressed. • The battery will drain faster than usual. • This function is not available in the following cases: – In preview mode – In low light situations [Eye Sensor AF] [ON] / `[OFF] When looking through the viewfinder, if the eye sensor operates, then AF will function.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] [Keep Enlarged Display] `[ON] / [OFF] [PIP Display] [FULL] / `[PIP] Sets the operation of the function for enlarging the video live view (Î[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 356). [Keep Enlarged Display] [ON]: Enlarges display after releasing the Fn button until the button is pressed again. [OFF]: Enlarges display just while the Fn button is being pressed.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Custom] menu ([Operation]) `: Default settings [Q.MENU Settings] [Layout Style] `[MODE1] / [MODE2] [Front Dial Assignment] [Item] / `[Value] [Item Customize (Photo)] [Item Customize (Video)] Customizes the Quick menu. (ÎQuick Menu Customization: 535) [Touch Settings] [Touch Screen] `[ON] / [OFF] [Touch Tab] [ON] / `[OFF] [Touch AF] `[AF] / [AF+AE] [EXACT] / [OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7] / [Touch Pad AF] `[OFF] Enables touch operation on the monitor display.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Lock Lever Setting] [AF ON] button [ ] / `[ Joystick `[ ]/[ ] [Q] button [ ] / `[ ] Cursor buttons / [MENU/SET] button `[ ]/[ ] Control dial `[ ]/[ ] [ [ ] / `[ ] [ ] / `[ ] `[ ]/[ ] [ ] / `[ ] ] (AF mode) button [ ] (Playback) button Touch screen [ ] (Cancel) button / [ ] (Delete) button / Fn button (Fn1) ] [DISP.] button `[ ]/[ ] [ [ ] / `[ ] [ISO] button [ ] / `[ ] [ [ ] / `[ ] Rear dial `[ ]/[ ] Video rec.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu Sets the operations to be disabled with the operation lock lever. (Only for recording screen) • The lock is applied or released each time you press . • Press [DISP.] to change the page. • The default settings are restored when you press [Q]. •[ ] is displayed on the screen when you try to operate an operation part that is locked. • Operation parts locked by “Lens” depend on the lens. Lens switches are not locked.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] [WHILE PRESSING] / [AFTER PRESSING1] / `[AFTER PRESSING2] This sets the operation to be performed when [WB] (White balance), [ISO] (ISO sensitivity) or [ ] (Exposure compensation) is pressed. [WHILE PRESSING]: Allows you to change the setting while pressing and holding the button. Release the button to confirm the settings value, and to return to the recording screen. [AFTER PRESSING1]: Press the button to change settings.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Dial Set.] `[SET1] / [SET2] / [SET3] / [SET4] / [Assign Dial (F/SS)] [SET5] Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Exposure Comp.] [ Assigns exposure compensation to or ]/[ ] / `[OFF] . (Except in [M] mode) • The [Assign Dial (F/SS)] setting takes priority. [Dial Operation Switch Setup] [ ] [ ] In the Fn button [Dial Operation Switch], this sets the functions to be registerd temporarily to or . (ÎRegister Functions to the Dials: 532) [Rotation (Menu Operation)] `[ [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/ ] Changes the rotational direction of the dials when operating menus.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] You can register a favorite function to the video rec. button on a Shutter Remote Control (optional). (ÎShutter Remote Control (Optional): 703) • [Video Record] is registered in the default setting.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) `: Default settings [Auto Review] [Duration Time (photo)] [HOLD] / [5SEC] to [0.5SEC] / `[OFF] [Playback Operation Priority] [ON] / `[OFF] This displays an image immediately after it is recorded. [Duration Time (photo)]: Sets the Auto Review when taking pictures. [Playback Operation Priority]: When this is set to [ON], you can toggle the playback screen during Auto Review, or delete pictures.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Histogram] [ON] / `[OFF] This displays the histogram. Turning this [ON] displays the histogram transition screen. Press 3421 to set the position. Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick. • You can also move the position by dragging the histogram on the recording screen. • A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis, and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Photo Grid Line] [ ]/[ ]/[ ] / `[OFF] Sets the grid line pattern to be displayed on the recording screen. When using [ ], you can press 3421 to set the position. Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick. • When using [ ], you can also drag [ ] on the grid lines on the recording screen to move the position.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Night Mode] [Monitor] [ON] / `[OFF] [LVF] [ON] / `[OFF] Displays the monitor and viewfinder in red. In dark environments, this reduces brightness of the screen that can make the surroundings difficult to see. You can also set the luminance of the red display. 1 Press 3421 to select [ON] on the monitor or viewfinder (LVF). 2 Press [DISP.] to display the brightness adjustment screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] [LVF Disp. Set] [ ] / `[ ] [Monitor Disp. Set] [ ] / `[ ] Selects whether to show the live view without covering the information display, or to display over the entire screen. [ ]: Scales down images slightly so you can better review the composition of the images. FINE L AFS ±0 [ 999 ]: Scales images to fill the entire screen so you can see their details.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)] `[AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF] [Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)] `[AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF] You can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of the monitor during recording. [Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)] [AUTO]: The screen automatically flips horizontally according to the angle to which the monitor is opened or closed. [ON]: The screen is flipped horizontally all the time. [OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Expo.Meter] [ON] / `[OFF] This displays the exposure meter. SS F 8 2.8 15 4.0 30 30 5.6 60 8.0 125 11 F5.6 • Set to [ON] to display the exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed. • If no operations are performed for a certain period of time, the exposure meter disappears. [Focal Length] `[ON] / [OFF] Displays the focal length on the recording screen during zoom control.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Sheer Overlay] [ON] / `[OFF] [Transparency] [Image Select] [SET] [Reset at Power Off] [Disp. Image (shutter-press)] Displays recorded pictures by overlapping on the recording screen. • Use [Image Select] to select the pictures to be displayed. Press 21 to select pictures and then press or to confirm. • If you set [Disp. Image (shutter-press)] to [OFF], [Sheer Overlay] is canceled while the shutter button is being pressed halfway or pressed fully.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Level Gauge] `[ON] / [OFF] Displays the level gauge which is useful in correcting camera tilt. (D) (E) (F) (D) Horizontal (E) Vertical (F) Green (no tilt) • Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approx. ±1o. • When the camera is tilted significantly upwards or downwards, the level gauge may not be displayed correctly. • You can adjust the level gauge and reset the adjusted values in [Level Gauge Adjust.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Show/Hide Monitor Layout] [Control Panel] `[ON] / [OFF] [Black Screen] `[ON] / [OFF] Displays the control panel and black screen when switching between displays using [DISP.] button.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) `: Default settings [V-Log View Assist] [Read LUT File] [LUT Select] [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [ON] / `[OFF] [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [ON] / `[OFF] You can show images with LUT data applied on the monitor/viewfinder, or output them via HDMI.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Monochrome Live View] [ON] / `[OFF] You can display the recording screen in black and white. • If you use the HDMI output during recording, the output image will not be displayed in black and white. • [Monochrome Live View] is not available when [Night Mode] is used. [Center Marker] [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] / `[OFF] The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+]. The shape of the marker can be changed.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Frame Marker] [ON] / `[OFF] [Frame Aspect] [SET] [Frame Color] [Frame Mask] A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen. [Frame Aspect] can also be customized. (Î[Frame Marker]: 410) [Zebra Pattern] [ZEBRA1] / [ZEBRA2] / [ZEBRA1+2] / `[OFF] [SET] [Zebra 1] [Zebra 2] Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Color Bars] [SMPTE] / [EBU] / [ARIB] The color bars are displayed on the recording screen. (ÎColor Bars/Test Tone: 412) [Video-Priority Display] [ON] / `[OFF] When in [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, switch the recording screen display and the control panel to suit video recording, as with the [ ] mode. The playback screen also switches to a display that prioritizes video.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]) `: Default settings [HDMI Rec Output] [Info Display] (ÎOutputting the Camera [ON] / `[OFF] Information Display via HDMI: 471) [Down Convert] (ÎHDMI Output Image `[AUTO] / [C4K/4K] / [1080p] / [1080i] / Quality: 462) [OFF] [HDMI Recording Control] (ÎOutputting [ON] / `[OFF] Control Information to an External Recorder: 472) [Sound Output (HDMI)] (ÎOutputting `[ON] / [OFF] Audio via HDMI: 473) [Enlarged Live Display] (ÎOutputting the Enla
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Fan Mode] [AUTO1] / `[AUTO2] / [FAST] / [NORMAL] / [SLOW] / [OFF] Sets fan operation. [AUTO1]: The camera switches [SLOW]/[NORMAL] automatically according to the temperature of the camera. This setting prioritizes controlling rises in temperature in the camera. [AUTO2]: The camera switches [OFF]/[SLOW]/[NORMAL] automatically according to the temperature of the camera. [FAST]: The fan operates constantly at fast speed.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]) `: Default settings [Lens Focus Resume] [ON] / `[OFF] The camera saves the focus position when you turn it off. When using an interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom, the zoom position is also saved. [Power Zoom Lens] [Step Zoom] [Zoom Speed] [Zoom Ring] [ON] / `[OFF] [Photo]: [H] / `[M] / [L] [Video]: [H] / `[M] / [L] `[ON] / [OFF] This sets the zoom operation when using a lens that supports power zoom (motorized zoom).
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Lens Fn Button Setting] `[Focus Stop] / [AF Mode] / [AF Detection Setting] / [Detecting Subject] / [Focus Ring Lock] / [AE LOCK] / [AF LOCK] / [AF/AE LOCK] / [AF-ON] / [AF-ON : Near Shift] / [AF-ON : Far Shift] / [Focus Area Set] / [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] / [Image Stabilizer] / [Preview] / [Preview Aperture Effect] / [No Setting] / [Off (Disable Press and Hold)] / [Restore to Default] Register a function to the focus button of an interchangeable lens.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Focus Ring Control] `[NON-LINEAR] / [LINEAR] [SET] [90°] to [1080°] (`[300°]) / [Maximum] Sets the amount of movement for focusing using the focus ring. (When using supported lenses) [NON-LINEAR]: Focus responds by accelerating according to rotation speed of the focus ring. [LINEAR]: Focus responds at a constant amount according to the rotational angle of the focus ring.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu [Lens Information] [Lens1] to [Lens12] (`[Lens1]) When using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera, register the lens information in the camera. • This is linked with [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer] under the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu. (Î[Lens Information]: 266) [Lens Info.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Setup] Menu ≥ [Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 586 ≥ [Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]): 594 ≥ [Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]): 598 ≥ [Setup] menu ([Setting]): 604 ≥ [Setup] menu ([Others]): 606 585
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Setup] menu ([Card/File]) `: Default settings [Card Format] [Card Slot 1(CFexpress)] / [Card Slot 2(SD)] Formats the card (initialization). Format the cards with the camera before use. Low level formatting of CFexpress cards When formatting CFexpress cards, you can select whether to perform a low level format. If the writing speed of the card has started to drop, we recommend performing a low level format. 1 Select [Card Slot 1(CFexpress)]. 2 Press [DISP.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Double Card Slot Function] `[ [Recording Method] ]/[ ]/[ ] This sets the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed. [Relay Rec]: Selects the priority of card slots for recording. [Destination Card Slot]: [ ]/[ ] Relays recording to the card in the other card slot after the first card runs out of free space. • You can assign the function that changes the card which is prioritized for recording to an Fn button.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Video File Name] `[Same As Photo(DCF Standard)] / [CINE Style] The folder name and file name used when saving video to cards are switched to CINE Style. [Same As Photo(DCF Standard)]: Video files are saved using the same naming convention as pictures. The storage destination is within the DCIM folder. [CINE Style]: The naming convention for video files is switched to CINE Style. The storage destination is within the PRIVATE folder.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu File name A001C001_221201_E125.MOV (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (7) Camera index (1 alphabetic character, A to Z) (8) Card number (3 numeric characters, 001 to 999) (9) Clip number (4 alphanumeric characters, C001 to C999) (10) Year, month, day (YYMMDD) (11) Hash value (4 alphanumeric characters) (12) Extension • Use a card with a capacity of 48 GB or greater to set to [CINE Style]. • Up to 999 files can be stored in each folder.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [CINE Style File Setting] `[Camera Index] / [Next Card Number] When [Video File Name] is set to [CINE Style], volume labels can be set for cards. The volume label will be the [Camera Index]+[Next Card Number] set by the following. [Camera Index]: The camera index of the volume label can be set in the range between A and Z. [Next Card Number]: The card number of the volume label can be set in the range between 001 and 999.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Folder / File Settings] [Select Folder] / [Create a New Folder] / [File Name Setting] Sets the folder and file names used for images saved within the DCIM folder. Folder name 100ABCDE (1) (2) (1) Folder number (3 numeric characters, 100 to 999) (2) 5-character user-defined segment File name PABC0001.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [File Name Setting] [Folder Number Link]: Uses the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above) to set the folder number ((1) above). [User Setting]: Changes the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above). • Follow the steps on “Entering Characters” when the character entry screen is displayed. (ÎEntering Characters: 105) Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, [ _ ] • Each folder can store up to 1000 files.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [File Number Reset] [Card Slot 1(CFexpress)] / [Card Slot 2(SD)] Refresh the folder number within the DCIM folder and reset the file number to 0001. • When the folder number reaches 999, the file number cannot be reset. We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card. • To reset the folder number to 100: 1 Perform [Card Format] to format the card. (Î[Card Format]: 586) 2 Perform [File Number Reset] to reset the file number.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]) `: Default settings [Power Save Mode] [Sleep Mode] [10MIN.] / `[5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] / [OFF] [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] `[ON] / [OFF] [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] `[5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] / [OFF] [Power Save LVF Shooting] [Time to Sleep] [Method of Activation] This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a set time.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Thermal Management] [HIGH] / `[STANDARD] [Recording Max Temperature] This sets the temperature during video recording at which the camera automatically stops recording. When set to [HIGH], recording continues even if the camera temperature rises. [Recording Max Temperature] [HIGH]: Sets the temperature at which recording is stopped due to the camera temperature rising to a higher temperature. • You can record for a longer time, but the camera body will become hot.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder] [Brightness] / [Contrast] / [Saturation] / [Red Tint] / [Blue Tint] This adjusts the brightness, coloring, and red or blue tints of the monitor/viewfinder. 1 Press 34 to select the setting item, and press 21 to adjust. 2 Press or to confirm the setting. • It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in use.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Eye Sensor] `[HIGH] / [LOW] [Sensitivity] This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor. `[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic viewfinder/monitor switching) / [LVF] [LVF/Monitor Switch] (viewfinder) / [MON] (monitor) This will set the method for switching between the viewfinder and monitor. • If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor Switch] setting will also switch. [Level Gauge Adjust.] [Adjust.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]) `: Default settings [Beep] [Beep Volume] [ ] (High) / `[ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off) [AF Beep Volume] [ ] (High) / `[ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off) `[ [AF Beep Tone] [E-Shutter Vol] [ ] (Pattern 3) [ ] (High) / `[ `[ [E-Shutter Tone] ] (Pattern 1) / [ [ ] (Pattern 2) / ] (Low) / [ ] (Pattern 1) / [ ] (Off) ] (Pattern 2) / ] (Pattern 3) Sets the beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)] `[COMBINED WITH REC] / [CH1/CH2] / [CH3/CH4] / [CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4] / [CH1] / [CH2] / [CH3] / [CH4] / [CH1+CH2] / [CH3+CH4] / [CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4] During video playback, this selects the audio channel output to the speaker on the camera or the headphones. For information about output audio (Î[Sound Monitoring Channel]: 384) [COMBINED WITH REC]: Outputs audio with the same settings as [Sound Monitoring Channel] in the [Video] ([Audio]) menu.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628) [Send Image (Smartphone)] (ÎUsing the menu to transfer easily: 641) [Remote Wakeup] (Î[Remote Wakeup]: 655) [Returning from Sleep Mode] (ÎShortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]: 648) [Auto Transfer] (Î[Auto Transfer]: 651) [Location Logging] (Î[Location Logging]: 653) [Auto Clock Set] (Î[Auto Clock Set]: 657) [Wi-Fi network settings] [Wi-Fi network settings]: Registers the Wi-Fi acces
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [USB] `[ [USB Mode] ] [Select on connection] / [ [PC(Storage)] / [ ] ] [PC(Tether)] / [ ] [PictBridge(PTP)] This sets the communication method to be used when the USB connection cable is connected. [ ] [Select on connection]: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device. (ÎUSB port: 681) [ ] [PC(Storage)]: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [HDMI Connection] `[AUTO] / [C4K/120p] / [C4K/100p] / [C4K/60p] / [C4K/50p] / [C4K/30p] / [C4K/25p] / [C4K/24p] / [4K/120p] / [4K/ [Output Resolution(Playback)] 100p] / [4K/60p] / [4K/50p] / [4K/30p] / [4K/25p] / [4K/24p] / [1080/120p] / [1080/ 100p] / [1080p] / [1080i] / [720p] / [576p] / [480p] Sets the HDMI output resolution for playback. [AUTO]: Outputs with a resolution suited to the connected external device.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu `[AUTO] / [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF] [HLG View Assist (HDMI)] At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and brightness for display. • This is linked with [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] under the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. (Î[HLG View Assist]: 438) [ON] / `[OFF] [VIERA Link (CEC)] You can use the device remote control to operate the camera when it is connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI cable.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Setup] menu ([Setting]) [Save to Custom Mode] [C1] / [C2] / [C3] / [C4-1] to [C4-10] You can register the currently set information of the camera. (ÎRegister in Custom Mode: 543) [Load Custom Mode] [C1] / [C2] / [C3] / [C4-1] to [C4-10] Calls up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode and overwrites the current settings with these. (ÎCalling Up Settings: 546) [Custom Mode Settings] [Limit No.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Save/Restore Camera Setting] [Save] / [Load] / [Delete] / [Keep Settings While Format] Saves the camera’s settings information to the card. Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the same settings on multiple cameras. [Save]: Saves the camera’s settings information to the card. • If saving new data, then select [New File], and if overwriting an existing file, select that existing file.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Setup] menu ([Others]) [Clock Set] Sets the date and time. (ÎSetting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time): 72) [Time Zone] Sets the time zone. Press 21 to select the time zone and then press or to confirm. (A) (B) (A) Current time (B) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) • If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move forward by 1 hour.) To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [System Frequency] [59.94Hz (NTSC)] / [50.00Hz (PAL)] / [24.00Hz (CINEMA)] * Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased. This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played back with the camera. (Î[System Frequency]: 132) [Pixel Refresh] This optimizes the image sensor and image processing. • The image sensor and image processing are optimized when the camera is purchased.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu [Firmware Version] [Firmware Update] / [Software info] You can check the firmware versions of the camera and lens. In addition, you can update the firmware, and display information about the camera software. [Firmware Update]: Updates firmware. 1 Download the firmware. (ÎFirmware of Your Camera/Lens: 18) 2 Save the firmware to the root directory of the card (the first folder that appears when you access the card on your PC), and then insert the card into the camera.
Camera Customization – My Menu My Menu ≥ Registration in My Menu: 609 ≥ Edit My Menu: 610 Register frequently-used menus in My Menu. A maximum of 23 items can be registered. Registered menus can be called up from [ ] to [ ]. Registration in My Menu 1 Select [Add]. 2 Register. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Add] ≥Select the menu to register and then press Calling up My Menu Call up the menus registered in My Menu. ¨[ ]¨[ ]/[ ]/[ ] ¨ Registered menus 609 or .
Camera Customization – My Menu Edit My Menu You can reorder the display order of My Menu, and delete unnecessary menus. ¨[ ] ¨ Select [ ] [Add] Selects and registers the menus to be displayed in My Menu. [Sorting] Changes the order of My Menu. Select the menu to change, then set the destination. [Delete] Deletes menus that are registered to My Menu. [Delete Item]: Selects the menu, then deletes. [Delete All]: Deletes all menus registered in My Menu.
List of Menu Camera customization and many function settings are performed with menus on this camera. This chapter introduces all of the menu items in a list format.
List of Menu – [Photo] menu [Photo] menu : Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings are synchronized.
List of Menu – [Photo] menu [Flash] ≥ [Flash Mode] (Î[Flash Mode]: 329) ≥ [Firing Mode] (Î[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 332) ≥ [Flash Adjust.] (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 334) ≥ [Flash Synchro] (Î[Flash Synchro]: 335) ≥ [Manual Flash Adjust.] (Î[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 332) ≥ [Auto Exposure Comp.] (Î[Auto Exposure Comp.
List of Menu – [Video] menu [Video] menu : Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings are synchronized.
List of Menu – [Video] menu [Focus] ≥ [AF Detection Setting] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 170) ≥ [Detecting Subject] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 170) ≥ [AF Custom Setting(Video)] (Î[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 355) ≥ [Focus Limiter] (Î[Focus Limiter]: 163) ≥ [Continuous AF] (Î[Continuous AF]: 353) ≥ [AF Assist Light] (Î[AF Assist Light]: 165) ≥ [Focus Peaking] (Î[Focus Peaking]: 202) ≥ [1-Area AF Moving Speed] (Î[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 166) [Audio] ≥ [Sound Rec Level Disp.] (Î[Sound Rec Level Disp.
List of Menu – [Video] menu [Others (Video)] ≥ [Silent Mode] (Î[Silent Mode]: 250) ≥ [Image Stabilizer] (ÎImage Stabilizer: 259) ≥ [Self Timer Setting] (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 238) ≥ [Focus Transition] (Î[Focus Transition]: 425) ≥ [Loop Recording (video)] (Î[Loop Recording (video)]: 445) ≥ [Segmented File Recording] (Î[Segmented File Recording]: 448) 616
List of Menu – [Custom] menu [Custom] menu [Image Quality] (Î[Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 548) ≥ [Photo Style Settings] (Î[Photo Style Settings]: 548) ≥ [ISO Increments] (Î[ISO Increments]: 548) ≥ [Extended ISO] (Î[Extended ISO]: 549) ≥ [Exposure Offset Adjust.] (Î[Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 549) ≥ [Face Priority In Multi Metering] (Î[Face Priority In Multi Metering]: 549) ≥ [Color Space] (Î[Color Space]: 550) ≥ [Exposure Comp. Reset] (Î[Exposure Comp.
List of Menu – [Custom] menu [Operation] (Î[Custom] menu ([Operation]): 558) ≥ [Q.MENU Settings] (Î[Q.MENU Settings]: 558) ≥ [Touch Settings] (Î[Touch Settings]: 558) ≥ [Lock Lever Setting] (Î[Lock Lever Setting]: 559) ≥ [Fn Button Set] (Î[Fn Button Set]: 560) ≥ [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] (Î[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 561) ≥ [ISO Displayed Setting] (Î[ISO Displayed Setting]: 561) ≥ [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (Î[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 561) ≥ [Dial Set.] (Î[Dial Set.
List of Menu – [Custom] menu [Monitor / Display (Video)] (Î[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 575) ≥ [V-Log View Assist] (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 575) ≥ [HLG View Assist] (Î[HLG View Assist]: 575) ≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 575) ≥ [Monochrome Live View] (Î[Monochrome Live View]: 576) ≥ [Center Marker] (Î[Center Marker]: 576) ≥ [Safety Zone Marker] (Î[Safety Zone Marker]: 576) ≥ [Frame Marker] (Î[Frame Marker]: 577) ≥ [Zebra Pattern] (Î[Zebra Pattern]: 577) ≥
List of Menu – [Setup] menu [Setup] menu [Card/File] (Î[Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 586) ≥ [Card Format] (Î[Card Format]: 586) ≥ [Double Card Slot Function] (Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 587) ≥ [Video File Name] (Î[Video File Name]: 588) ≥ [CINE Style File Setting] (Î[CINE Style File Setting]: 590) ≥ [Folder / File Settings] (Î[Folder / File Settings]: 591) ≥ [File Number Reset] (Î[File Number Reset]: 593) ≥ [Copyright Information] (Î[Copyright Information]: 593) [Monitor / Display] (Î[Setup] menu ([Monito
List of Menu – [Setup] menu [Setting] (Î[Setup] menu ([Setting]): 604) ≥ [Save to Custom Mode] (Î[Save to Custom Mode]: 604) ≥ [Load Custom Mode] (Î[Load Custom Mode]: 604) ≥ [Custom Mode Settings] (Î[Custom Mode Settings]: 604) ≥ [Save/Restore Camera Setting] (Î[Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 605) ≥ [Reset] (Î[Reset]: 605) [Others] (Î[Setup] menu ([Others]): 606) ≥ [Clock Set] (Î[Clock Set]: 606) ≥ [Time Zone] (Î[Time Zone]: 606) ≥ [System Frequency] (Î[System Frequency]: 607) ≥ [Pixel Refresh] (Î[Pixel Re
List of Menu – [My Menu] [My Menu] [Page 1] (ÎMy Menu: 609) [Page 2] (ÎMy Menu: 609) [Page 3] (ÎMy Menu: 609) [Edit My Menu] (ÎEdit My Menu: 610) ≥ [Add] ≥ [Sorting] ≥ [Delete] ≥ [Display from My Menu] 622
List of Menu – [Playback] menu [Playback] menu [Playback Mode] (Î[Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 506) ≥ [Playback Mode] (Î[Playback Mode]: 506) ≥ [Slide Show] (Î[Slide Show]: 506) ≥ [Rotate Disp.] (Î[Rotate Disp.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth This chapter explains the Wi-Fi® and Bluetooth® functions of the camera. • This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth • Do not remove the card or battery or move to an area without any reception while sending images. • The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection. • We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information security. • We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery when sending images. • When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or maintain communication with other devices.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Connecting to a Smartphone ≥ Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 627 ≥ Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628 ≥ Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 634 ≥ Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple Operations: 640 Connect with a smartphone which has the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” (below: “LUMIX Sync”) smartphone app installed. Use “LUMIX Sync” for remote recording and image transfers.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Installing “LUMIX Sync” “LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic. Supported OS Android™: Android 7 or higher iOS: iOS 12 or higher 1 2 3 4 Connect the smartphone to a network. (Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”. (iOS) Select “App Store”. Enter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix sync” into the search box. Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync ” . • Use the latest version.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection) Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy. When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi. • For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone 1 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”. ≥A message regarding device (camera) registration is displayed. Select [Next]. • If you have closed the message, select [ ], then register the camera using [Camera registration (pairing)]. LUMIX Sync 2 Check the content in the displayed guide and select [Next] until the screen to register the camera is displayed.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Operating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide. 3 Set the camera to Bluetooth pairing standby state. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [SET] ¨ [Pairing] ≥The camera enters pairing standby state and the device name (A) is displayed. ≥ (A) 4 On the smartphone, select the camera’s device name. • (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed, select [Join].
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone 5 When a message indicating that device registration is complete, select [OK]. ≥A Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone will be made. OK • The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device. • During Bluetooth connection, [ ] is displayed in the recording screen. When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established with the smartphone, [ ] appears translucent. • Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Connecting to a Paired Smartphone Connect paired smartphones using the following procedure. 1 Enable the Bluetooth function of the camera. 2 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”. • ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [ON] • If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for cameras, close the message. 3 Select [ ]. LUMIX Sync 4 Select [Bluetooth Setup]. 5 Turn Bluetooth ON.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Canceling Pairing 1 Cancel the pairing setting of the camera. 2 Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing. • ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [SET] ¨ [Delete] • Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone. • When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]) Use Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone. With default settings, simple connection with smartphones is possible without entering a password. You can also use password authentication for enhanced connection security. 1 Set the camera to Wi-Fi connection standby status.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone 3 Select the SSID displayed on the camera. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi XXXXXXXX i i 4 5 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”. (At the first connection) Confirm the device name displayed on the camera and then select [Yes]. • When a device different than the one you want to connect to is displayed, the camera will automatically connect to that device if you select [Yes].
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Using Password Authentication to Connect You can enhance Wi-Fi connection security by using password authentication through either QR code or manual input. Scanning QR code to connect 1 Set [Wi-Fi Password] on the camera to [ON]. 2 Display the QR code (C).
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Manually entering a password to connect 1 Display the screen in Step 2 (ÎScanning QR code to connect: 636). 2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi XXXXXXXX i i 3 On the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the SSID (D) displayed on the camera. 4 (At the first connection) Enter the password (D) displayed on the camera. 5 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Connection Methods Other Than the Default Settings When connecting with [Via Network], or [WPS Connection] in [Direct], follow the steps below: 1 Display the connection method setting screen for the camera. • ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New Connection] ¨ [Control With Smartphone] 2 Press [DISP.]. Connecting via network 1 Select [Via Network] and then press or . • Connect the camera to a wireless access point.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection To end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow the steps below. 1 Press the shutter button halfway to put the camera in recording mode. 2 Terminate the Wi-Fi connection. • ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Yes] • You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Wi-Fi]. (ÎFn Buttons: 517) 3 On the smartphone, close the “LUMIX Sync”.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple Operations You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by pressing [Q] during playback. You can also use the menu to connect easily. • You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with [Send Image (Smartphone)]. (ÎFn Buttons: 517) Getting started: • Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone Send multiple images 1 Press [Q]. 2 Select [Multi Select]. • To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (ÎImage Send Settings: 675) 3 Select the images and then transfer. 21: Select images or : Set/Cancel [DISP.]: Transfer 4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices). • This connects automatically using Wi-Fi. • This function is not available when [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON].
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone Operating the Camera with a Smartphone ≥ [Remote shooting]: 644 ≥ [Shutter Remote Control]: 646 ≥ [Import images]: 649 ≥ [Auto Transfer]: 651 ≥ [Location Logging]: 653 ≥ [Remote Wakeup]: 655 ≥ [Auto Clock Set]: 657 ≥ [Camera settings copy]: 658 This explains the functions for operating the camera from a smartphone. Functions described in this document with the ( Bluetooth ) symbol require a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone Home Screen When you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed. LUMIX Sync (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (A) : App settings (ÎConnecting to a Paired Smartphone: 632, Using Password Authentication to Connect: 636, [Remote Wakeup]: 655) This allows connection settings, camera power operations, and displays Help.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone [Remote shooting] You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while viewing the live view images from the camera. Getting started: • Connect the camera to a smartphone. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 634) • On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”. 1 Select [ 2 Start recording. ] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone Operation Method During Remote Recording Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording. ¨[ ]¨[ Remote Device] ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup] ¨ Select [Priority of [Camera] Operation is possible on both the camera and the smartphone. • The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone. [Smartphone] Operation is possible only on the smartphone.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone [Shutter Remote Control] Bluetooth You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter. Getting started: • Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628) • On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”. 1 2 Select [ screen. ] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home Start recording.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone Bulb Recording The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery. Getting started: • Set the camera to [M] mode. (ÎManual Exposure Mode: 280) • Set the camera shutter speed to [B] (Bulb). (Î[B] (Bulb): 284) 1 Touch [ 2 Remove your finger from [ • Slide [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your finger). ] to end recording.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode] You can shorten the time it takes for the camera to return from [Sleep Mode] when the [Shutter Remote Control] is used. Getting started: • Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628) • Set [Remote Wakeup] in [Bluetooth] to [ON].
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone [Import images] Transfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone connected via Wi-Fi. Getting started: • Connect the camera to a smartphone. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 634) • On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”. 1 Select [ 2 Select the image to transfer. ] ([Import images]) in the home screen.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone 3 Transfer the image. ≥Select [ ]. • If the image is a video, you can play it back by touching [ ] at the center of the screen. • When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted using “LUMIX Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the actual video recording.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone [Auto Transfer] Bluetooth You can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they are taken. Getting started: • Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628) 1 Enable [Auto Transfer] on the camera.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone 4 Record with the camera. •[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being sent. To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Auto Transfer] ¨ Select [OFF] ≥ A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone [Location Logging] Bluetooth The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth, and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired location information. Getting started: • Enable the GPS function on the smartphone. • Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628) 1 Enable [Location Logging] on the camera.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone • When [ GPS ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location information cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written. Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is within a building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position affording a wide view of the sky to improve positioning performance. In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone [Remote Wakeup] Bluetooth Even when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start the camera and record images, or check the recorded images. Getting started: 1 Connect to a smartphone using Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628) 2 Enable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera. 3 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]. 4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone • When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], images recorded while remote operation is running are automatically transferred to a smartphone. If [Power OFF] is selected while there are still unsent images, sending is resumed when the camera is next turned on. • When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues to work even if the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will drain.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone [Auto Clock Set] Bluetooth Synchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those of a smartphone. Getting started: • Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628) Enable [Auto Clock Set] on the camera.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone [Camera settings copy] Bluetooth This saves the camera’s settings information to the smartphone. Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the same settings on multiple cameras. Getting started: • Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628) 1 2 Select [ ] ([Others]) ¨ [ ] ([Camera settings copy]) in the “ LUMIX Sync” home screen.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera Sending Images from the Camera ≥ [PC]: 662 ≥ [Printer]: 665 Operate the camera to send recorded images to a device connected by Wi-Fi. Refer to the following pages for the steps common to all devices.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera Images That Can be Sent Images that can be sent differ depending on the destination device. Images that can be sent Destination device [Send Images to PC [Send Images Stored in While Recording] [PC] (Î[PC]: 662) [Printer] (Î[Printer]: 665) the Camera] JPEG/RAW/MP4/MOV/ JPEG/RAW Apple ProRes — JPEG • Depending on the OS version, these may not be displayed correctly. • Sending may not be possible depending on your device.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi] You can perform the following operations by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Wi-Fi] after connecting to Wi-Fi. (ÎFn Buttons: 517) [Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection. [Change the Destination] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select a different Wi-Fi connection. [Change Settings for Sending Images] Sets the image size, file format, and other items for sending recorded images.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera [PC] Send recorded images to the PC connected with Wi-Fi. Supported OS Windows: Windows 10 Mac: macOS 10.13, 10.14, 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.4 Getting started: • Turn on the PC. • Create a destination folder for images. • If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting, change the corresponding setting of the camera in [PC Connection].
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera • Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to 32 characters) consisting of alphanumeric characters. A destination folder may not be created if the account name includes non-alphanumeric characters. • When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank character), etc., it may not be recognized. In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15 or less alphanumeric characters.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera 5 6 7 Select a folder for storing images. • Folders sorted by sent date will be created in the selected folder, and images will be saved there. Check the send settings and then press or . • To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (ÎImage Send Settings: 675) (When [Send Images to PC While Recording] is selected) Take pictures. •[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being sent.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera [Printer] You can send images to a PictBridge (wireless LAN)*-supported printer connected by Wi-Fi for printing. * DPS over IP standard-compliant 1 2 3 4 5 Select the method for sending images on the camera. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New Connection] ¨ [Send Images Stored in the Camera] Set the destination to [Printer]. Connect the camera to a printer by Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections Wi-Fi Connections ≥ [Via Network]: 667 ≥ [Direct]: 671 ≥ Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings: 673 When [New Connection] has been selected in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, select the connection method from either [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections [Via Network] Connect the camera and destination device through the wireless access point. Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point. Settings: [WPS (Push-Button)]/[WPS (PIN code)]/[From List] (Î[WPS (Push-Button)]: 668, [WPS (PIN code)]: 668, [From List]: 669) • After selecting [Via Network] once, the camera will connect to the previously-used wireless access point. To change the wireless access point used for connection, press [DISP.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections [WPS (Push-Button)] Press the WPS button on the wireless access point to set up a connection. Press the wireless access point WPS button until it switches to WPS mode. Example) [WPS (PIN code)] Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a connection. 1 On the camera screen, select the wireless access point you are connecting to. 2 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless access point. 3 Press or of the camera.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections [From List] Searches for a wireless access point to use, and connects to this. • Confirm the encryption key of the wireless access point. 1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to. • Press [DISP.] to run a wireless access point search again. • If no wireless access point is found (ÎConnecting by Manual Input: 670) 2 (If network authentication is encrypted) Enter the encryption key.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections Connecting by Manual Input • Check the SSID, network authentication, encryption, and encryption key of the wireless access point you are using. 1 In the screen in Step 1 of “[From List]”, select [Manual Input]. (Î[From List]: 669) 2 Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, and then select [Set]. • How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 105) 3 Select the network authentication.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections [Direct] Directly connect the camera and the destination device. Select the method for connecting with the destination device. [WPS Connection] [WPS (Push-Button)]: Press the WPS button on the destination device to connect. • On the camera, press [DISP.] to extend the connection wait time. [WPS (PIN code)]: Enter the PIN code into the camera, and connect. [Manual Connection] Search for the camera on the destination device to connect.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections • Please also refer to the operating instructions for the device to be connected.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings Use the Wi-Fi connection history to connect using the same settings as previously. 1 Display the Wi-Fi connection history. 2 Select the History item to connect to. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Select a destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite] • Press [DISP.] to confirm details of the connection history.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections Editing Items Registered in Favorite 1 Display items registered to Favorite. • ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Select a destination from Favorite] 2 Select the History item to edit in Favorite and then press 1. [Remove from Favorite] [Change the Order in Favorite] Specify the destination location of the desired item to change the display order. [Change the Registered Name] Enter characters to change the registered name.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images Send Settings and Selecting Images ≥ Image Send Settings: 675 ≥ Selecting Images: 676 Image Send Settings Set the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the destination device. 1 2 After Wi-Fi connection, the send settings confirmation screen will be displayed, so press [DISP.]. Change the send settings. [Size] Resize the image to send.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images Selecting Images When sending by [Send Images Stored in the Camera], select the images using the following procedure. 1 2 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select]. Select the image. [Single Select] setting 1 Press 21 to select an image. 2 Press or . [Multi Select] setting 1 Press 3421 to select an image and then press or . (Repeat this) • To cancel the setting, press or again. • Images are displayed separately by card slot.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu This configures the settings required for the Wi-Fi function. The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi. Displaying the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup] [Priority of Remote Device] This sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu [Device Name/Password] You can change the camera name (SSID) and password. • Press [DISP.] to change the device name and password. How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 105) • Enter up to 32 characters for the device name and 63 characters for the password.
Connecting to Other Devices This chapter describes connections with other devices, for example, HDMI devices, such as TVs, and PCs. Connect using either the HDMI socket or the USB port on the camera.
Connecting to Other Devices – Connecting Connecting • Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug. (Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction) • Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction. HDMI socket Connect the camera and HDMI device (TV, etc.) with a commercially available HDMI cable. • Use an Ultra High Speed HDMI cable (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) long).
Connecting to Other Devices – Connecting USB port Use a USB connection cable to connect the camera to a PC, recorder, or printer. • Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV Viewing on a TV You can connect the camera to a TV or external monitor to view recorded pictures and videos. Getting started: • Turn off the camera and TV. 1 2 3 4 5 Connect the camera and TV with a commercially available HDMI cable. (ÎHDMI socket: 680) Turn on the TV. Switch the TV input to HDMI input. Turn on the camera. Display the playback screen. ≥Press [ ]. ≥The recorded images are displayed on the camera and TV.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV • With the default settings, pictures are output at the optimal resolution for the connected TV. The output resolution can be changed in [Output Resolution(Playback)]. (Î[Output Resolution(Playback)]: 602) • Depending on the aspect ratio, gray bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of images. You can change the band color in [Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV Using VIERA Link VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) is a function that allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when the camera has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI cable for automatic linked operations. (Not all operations are possible.) • To use VIERA Link, you need to also configure the settings on the TV. For the setting procedure, refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV • VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function using the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification. Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not guaranteed. • The camera supports “VIERA Link Ver.5”. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible devices. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional VIERA Link devices.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC Importing Images to a PC ≥ Copying Images to a PC: 687 ≥ Installing Software: 691 If you connect the camera to a PC, you can copy the recorded images to the PC. You will need to use software that is compatible with the recorded video format in order to play back or edit video on the PC. You can also use software for processing and editing RAW images.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC Copying Images to a PC After connecting to the PC, you can copy the recorded images by dragging files and folders on this camera to the PC. • The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs which can detect mass storage devices. Supported OS Windows: Windows 10 Mac: macOS 10.13, 10.14, 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.4 • Mac: Supported by “Final Cut Pro X”. For details on “Final Cut Pro X”, please contact Apple Inc.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC Getting started: • Turn on the camera and PC. 1 2 3 Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection cable. (ÎUSB port: 681) Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press . or ≥Windows: The drive (“LUMIX” or the volume label of the card set with [CINE Style File Setting]) is displayed in [This PC]. ≥Mac: The drive (“LUMIX” or the volume label of the card set with [CINE Style File Setting]) is displayed on the desktop.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC Folder Structure Inside Card (A) AD_LUMIX CAMSET (B) DCIM 100XXXXX (C) (D) PXXX0001.JPG (E) (F) (G) PRIVATE PANA_GRP (H) 001AXXAX (D) A001C001_XXXXXX_XXXX.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC (E) JPG: JPEG format pictures RW2: RAW format pictures MP4: MP4 videos MOV: MOV videos, Apple ProRes videos (F) File number (G) Color space P: sRGB _: AdobeRGB (H) CINE Style video (I) Card number (J) Camera index • If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection screen being displayed.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC Installing Software Install the software to process and edit RAW images. • To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet. • Supported OSs are current as of January 2022 and are subject to change. SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE This software processes and edits RAW images. Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be displayed on a PC.
Connecting to Other Devices – Storing on a Recorder Storing on a Recorder By connecting the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD recorder, you can store the pictures and videos. Getting started: • Turn on the camera and recorder. • Insert a card into card slot 1. 1 2 3 Connect the camera and recorder with the USB connection cable. (ÎUSB port: 681) Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press . or Operate the recorder to store the images.
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording Tethered Recording ≥ Installing Software: 694 ≥ Operating the Camera from a PC: 695 If you install the “LUMIX Tether” camera control software on your PC, you can connect the camera to the PC via USB and then control the camera from the PC and record while checking the live view on the PC screen (tethered recording). In addition, you can output via HDMI to an external monitor or TV during tethered recording.
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording Installing Software “LUMIX Tether” This software is for controlling the camera from a PC. It allows you to change various settings and to record remotely and then save the images to the PC. Check the following site and then download and install the software: https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html (English only) Operating environment ≥ Supported OS Windows: Windows 10 (64 bit) Mac: macOS 10.13, 10.14, 10.15.3 to 10.15.
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording Operating the Camera from a PC Getting started: • Turn on the camera and PC. • Install “LUMIX Tether” on PC. 1 2 3 Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection cable. (ÎUSB port: 681) Press 34 to select [PC(Tether)] and then press . ≥[ or ] is displayed on the camera’s screen. Use “LUMIX Tether” to operate the camera from the PC.
Connecting to Other Devices – Printing Printing If you connect the camera to a printer that supports PictBridge, you can select pictures on the camera’s monitor and then print them. Getting started: • Turn on the camera and printer. • Set the print quality and other settings on the printer. 1 Play back the card that contains the picture you want to print. ≥Press [ ]. ≥After pressing [ ], press 34 to select [Card Slot 1(CFexpress)] or [Card Slot 2(SD)], and then press or .
Connecting to Other Devices – Printing 4 Press 21 to select a picture and then press or ≥To print multiple pictures, press 3, set the picture selection method, and then select pictures. PictBridge 0XOWL 3ULQW 3ULQW [Multi Select] Selects the picture to print. 1 Press 3421 to select a picture and then press • To cancel the setting, press 2 or or again. Press [DISP.] to end selection. [Select All] Prints all the stored pictures. [Rating] Prints all pictures with [Rating] levels from [¿1] to [¿5].
Connecting to Other Devices – Printing Setting Items (Print Settings) [Print start] Starts printing. [Print with Date] Sets printing with date. • If the printer does not support printing with date, the date cannot be printed. [Num.of prints] Sets the number of prints to be printed (up to 999). [Paper Size] Sets the paper size. [Page Layout] Sets whether to add borders and how many images to be printed on each sheet of paper.
Connecting to Other Devices – Printing • If [USB Mode] is set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera will be automatically connected to the printer without the [USB Mode] selection screen being displayed. (Î[USB Mode]: 601) • Take care not to turn off the camera while printing is in progress. • When connecting with the printer is not possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [OFF] and then try connecting again.
Materials This chapter describes procedures to try when there is a problem and provides information about the specifications for your reference.
Materials – Digital Camera Accessory System Digital Camera Accessory System (Product numbers correct as of January 2022.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories Using Optional Accessories ≥ Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 703 ≥ Tripod Grip (Optional): 705 ≥ AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional): 706 • For information on the external flash (ÎUsing an External Flash (Optional): 324) • For information on the external microphone (ÎExternal Microphones (Optional): 374) • For information on the XLR Microphone Adaptor (ÎXLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 379) • Some optional accessories may not be available in some count
Materials – Using Optional Accessories Shutter Remote Control (Optional) You can connect the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) to use the camera as follows: • Fully pressing the shutter button without camera shake • Securing the shutter button during bulb recording and burst recording • Start/end the video recording • Using the functions registered in the video rec. button of the Shutter Remote Control Registering Functions to the Video Rec.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories • Always use a genuine Panasonic Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional). • Refer to the operating instructions for the Shutter Remote Control for details.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories Tripod Grip (Optional) Attach a Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional) to use it as a grip for recording while walking, a tripod, or a Shutter Remote Control. • Connect the grip cable to the [REMOTE] socket on the camera. • Always use a genuine Panasonic Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional). • The [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] menu does not work with the Tripod Grip. • Do not carry just by holding the hand strap when the camera is attached.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional) With an AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler (DMW-DCC17: optional), you can perform recording and playback without worrying about the remaining battery charge. • Be sure to purchase both an AC Adaptor and a DC Coupler as a set. They cannot be used independently of one another. • When the DC Coupler is being mounted, the DC Coupler cover opens, so the structure ceases to be dust and splash resistant.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays Monitor/Viewfinder Displays ≥ Recording Screen: 707 ≥ Playback Screen: 723 • The screen is an monitor display example of when [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] is set to [ ]. Recording Screen (1) RAW BKT + AWB FINE L AFS GPS Fn4 Fn5 (2) (6) EXPS Fn6 (3) Fn7 OFF (4) 24m59s AEL BKT 60 F2.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays BKT AWB AWB AWB White Balance Bracket, White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) (Î[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 249) Adjusting the white balance (ÎAdjusting the White Balance: 305) Photo Style (Î[Photo Style]: 307) EXPS Filter setting (Î[Filter Settings]: 317)/ Filter effect adjustment (ÎAdjusting the Filter Effect: 319) LUT View Assist (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 433) HLG View Assist (Î[HLG View Assist]: 438) Picture quality (Î[Picture Quality]: 123), Pi
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays MFL Focus ring lock (Î[Focus Ring Lock]: 554) Focus Peaking (Î[Focus Peaking]: 202) FULL Image area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 150) AF mode (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 167) AF detection setting (ÎAutomatic Detection: 170) Drive mode (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 210) Connected to Wi-Fi (ÎChecking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 624) Connected to Bluetooth (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 628) GPS Location logging (Î[Locatio
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (2) Self-timer (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 238) Silent mode (Î[Silent Mode]: 250) Image area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 150) Anamorphic Desqueeze Display (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 441) Overlay indication (Î[Sheer Overlay]: 572) LUT View Assist (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 433) Loop recording (Î[Loop Recording (video)]: 445) Dynamic Range Boost (Î[Dynamic Range Boost]: 363) (3) Built-in microphone, External microphone (Î[Sound Rec Level Disp.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (4) Histogram (Î[Histogram]: 566) AF area (ÎAF Area Movement Operation: 187) Spot metering target (Î[Metering Mode]: 268) Center marker (Î[Center Marker]: 576) Self-timer (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 238) Lock lever (ÎOperation Lock Lever: 86) 24m59s Elapsed recording time (ÎBasic Video Operations: 126) Time code (ÎTime Code: 386) Image being sent (Î[Auto Transfer]: 651) (5) Focus (turns green) (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 118)/ ¥ Recording state (turns red) (
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays Metering mode (Î[Metering Mode]: 268) AE AEL AE Lock (ÎLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 292) 60 Shutter speed (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 118) F2.8 Aperture value (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 118) BKT F2.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (6) Temperature rise warning icon (ÎRecording: 733) Fan error warning icon (ÎOthers: 746) A001C001 Video file name (when [CINE Style] is set) (Î[Video File Name]: 588) Touch Tab (Î[Touch Settings]: 558) Fn4 Fn button (ÎUse [Fn4] to [Fn8] (Touch Icons): 531) Touch Zoom (ÎOperations During Video Recording: 349) Touch AF, Touch Shutter (ÎTouch AF/Touch Shutter: 112) Exposure compensation (ÎExposure Compensation: 287) AE Touch AE (ÎTouch AE: 115) Focus Peaking (Î[
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (ÎSetting a Filter with Touch Operation: 320)/ (ÎOperations During Video Recording: 349) Filter effect adjustment (ÎAdjusting the Filter Effect: 319) Filter on/off (ÎSetting a Filter with Touch Operation: 320) EXPS Filter setting (Î[Filter Settings]: 317) Zoom (ÎOperations During Video Recording: 349) F Aperture value (ÎOperations During Video Recording: 349) SS Shutter speed (ÎOperations During Video Recording: 349) Exposure compensation (ÎOperations During V
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays Control Panel 1/60 F2.8 (1) 0 ISO (2) (3) 4:3 AFS (4) 0 0 100 Fn FINE 999 999 AWB (1) Recording mode (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 79) 1/60 Shutter speed (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 118) F2.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (3) Drive mode (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 210) AFS Focus mode (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 153, Record Using MF: 195) AF mode (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 167) FINE Picture quality (Î[Picture Quality]: 123) Image area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 150)/ Recording file format (Î[Rec.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (4) Photo Style (Î[Photo Style]: 307) AWB White balance (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 300) Metering mode (Î[Metering Mode]: 268) Card slot (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 60)/ Double card slot function (Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 587) No card Card full 999 r20 R24m59s ---- Number of pictures that can be taken (ÎNumber of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards: 770) Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (ÎNumber of Pictures That Can Be
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays Control Panel (Creative Video Mode) FPS (1) SHUTTER 60 (2) 11 3 (3) MOV 422/10-L FHD 59.94p 48kHz/24bit (4) IRIS F2.8 1/60 FULL TC DF 00:00:00:00 24m59s 24m59s -36 -24 -12 REC OFF -6 0 CH1 CH2 ISO (5) AUTO -2 -6 PHOTO STYLE 100 WB AWB (1) FPS 60 SHUTTER 1/60 IRIS F2.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (3) MOV 422/10-L FHD 59.94p Recording file format (Î[Rec.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (5) ISO AUTO 100 ISO sensitivity (ÎISO Sensitivity: 294) Photo Style (Î[Photo Style]: 307)/ LUT View Assist (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 433)/ HLG View Assist (Î[HLG View Assist]: 438) White balance (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 300) 720
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays Audio Information Display 4ch/96kHz/24bit -36 -24 -12 -6 (1) -36 -2 -6 -24 -12 -6 CH3 CH4 EXT. GAIN (2) 0 CH1 CH2 STD. 4ch MIC Input ON 0 -2 -6 Mute OFF Monitor Audio Quality 96kHz/24bit Monitor CH REALTIME CH1/CH2 (1) Built-in microphone, External microphone (Î[Sound Rec Level Disp.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (2) EXT.GAIN STD.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays Playback Screen 2022.12.1 10:00 (1) 100-0001 1/999 8m30s 3 (2) GPS (3) (4) 60 F2.8 ±0 ISO100 (5) FINE L (1) Playback mode (Î[Playback Mode]: 506) Recording date and time (ÎSetting the Clock (When Turning On 2022.12.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (2) 100-0001 A001C001 Folder/file number (Î[Folder / File Settings]: 591)/ Video file name (when [CINE Style] is set) (Î[Video File Name]: 588) 1/999 Image number/Total number of images SLF Number of group images/ ILOHV 8m30s Number of files Video recording time (ÎPlaying Back Videos: 477) XXmXXs XXs Variable frame rate (ÎVariable Frame Rate: 415) XXmXXs Loop recording (Î[Loop Recording (video)]: 445) MON MODE2 HLG View Assist (Î[HLG View Assist]: 4
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays (3) Playback (video) (ÎPlaying Back Videos: 477) Group images (ÎGroup Images: 492) Time code (ÎTime Code: 386) 96kHz/24bit MOV FHD 422/10-L 59.94p Sound recording quality (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 369) Recording file format (Î[Rec. File Format]: 134)/ Recording quality (Î[Rec Quality]: 136) Frame rate (Î[Rec Quality]: 136)/ 60/59.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays Detailed information display 1/5 AFS 4:3 L ISO 100 STD. 0 FINE sRGB 1 5500 F2.8 60 0 2022.12.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays Photo Style display 3/5 ISO 100 0 F2.8 60 2022.12. 1 10:00 100-0001 White balance display 4/5 1 5500K ISO 100 0 G A B F2.8 60 2022.12. 1 10:00 M 100-0001 Lens information display 5/5 ISO 60 100 0 F2.8 2022.12.
Materials – Message Displays Message Displays Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and response methods. Card [Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?] • It is a format that cannot be used with the camera. Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting. (Î[Card Format]: 586) [Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used] • Use a card compatible with the camera. (ÎMemory Cards That Can Be Used: 24) [Insert memory card again.
Materials – Message Displays [Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card] • The card does not meet the writing speed requirements for recording. Cards that can be used depend on the video image quality. Check whether the card you are using meets the conditions required for recording. (ÎSD Cards That Can Be Used with This Camera: 25) * Check with the card manufacturers for the specifications of their cards.
Materials – Message Displays Lens [The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button while lens is attached.] • Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release button. (ÎAttaching a Lens: 64) Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer. [Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached correctly.
Materials – Message Displays Others [Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be deleted] • Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted. Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (Î[Card Format]: 586) [A folder cannot be created] • The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot be created.
Materials – Troubleshooting Troubleshooting ≥ Power, Battery: 732 ≥ Recording: 733 ≥ Video: 738 ≥ Playback: 739 ≥ Monitor/Viewfinder: 740 ≥ Flash: 741 ≥ Wi-Fi Function: 742 ≥ TV, PC, Printer: 745 ≥ Others: 746 First, try out the following procedures. If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting [Reset] (Î[Reset]: 104) on the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu. Power, Battery The camera turns off automatically. • [Power Save Mode] is enabled.
Materials – Troubleshooting Recording Recording stops before finishing. Cannot record. Cannot use some functions. • The temperature of the camera or card rises more readily in the following circumstances: when the ambient temperature is high; and during continuous use such as when recording high-definition video, taking burst pictures at high speed, or outputting via HDMI. When the temperature of the camera or card rises, [ ] appears blinking on the screen.
Materials – Troubleshooting The recorded image is too bright or dark. • Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (ÎLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 292) Multiple images are recorded at once. • When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst Shot 1) or [ ] (Burst Shot 2), pressing and holding the shutter button will take burst pictures.
Materials – Troubleshooting The recorded image is blurred. The image stabilizer is not effective. • The shutter speed will become slower and the image stabilizer function may not work properly when recording in dark places. In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording. The recorded image looks rough. Noise appears on the picture. • Try the following: – Reduce the ISO sensitivity.
Materials – Troubleshooting Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting. • This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. This is not a malfunction. • When using the electronic shutter (Î[Shutter Type]: 252), lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes. • If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when recording video, this can be mitigated by fixing the shutter speed.
Materials – Troubleshooting The brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from the actual scene. • When recording under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, increasing the shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring. These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a malfunction.
Materials – Troubleshooting Video Cannot record videos. • Try again after either returning the [System Frequency] to the original setting or inserting another card. • When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after turning on the camera. • There are [Rec. File Format] and [Rec Quality] that cannot be recorded to SD cards. Use CFexpress cards. (ÎMemory Cards That Can Be Used: 24) In videos, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.
Materials – Troubleshooting Playback Cannot play back. There are no recorded pictures. • Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera. • Some images are not displayed when the [Playback Mode] is set. Set to [Normal Play]. (Î[Playback Mode]: 506) • Videos recorded with a different [System Frequency] setting cannot be played back. Return the [System Frequency] setting to the one you used during the recording.
Materials – Troubleshooting Monitor/Viewfinder The monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on. • If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] (Î[Auto LVF/Monitor Off]: 58) is activated, and the monitor/viewfinder turns off. • When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the monitor display may switch to the viewfinder display. It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change significantly for an instant.
Materials – Troubleshooting Updating of the information display on the screen is sometimes slow. • When using functions that put a burden on processing in the camera, updating of the information display on the screen may get slower, but this is not a malfunction. There will be no change to the images recorded. Functions that put a burden on processing in the camera: – [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of 60.
Materials – Troubleshooting Wi-Fi Function A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established. Radio waves get disconnected. Wireless access point is not displayed. General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection • Use within the communication range of the device to be connected. • Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens and cordless telephones may result in the radio wave being lost. Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.
Materials – Troubleshooting Cannot connect with a wireless access point. • The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong. Check the authentication type and encryption key. (ÎConnecting by Manual Input: 670) • Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point. Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as well as the status of other wireless devices. Wi-Fi connection on an iOS device fails.
Materials – Troubleshooting The PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection. The camera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function. • At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of “WORKGROUP”. If you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognized. In the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of the PC to which to connect. (Î[PC Connection]: 677) • Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.
Materials – Troubleshooting TV, PC, Printer The TV images are displayed with gray bands. • Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], gray bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of the images. You can change the band color in [Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. (Î[Background Color(Playback)]: 603) Images cannot be imported even when connected to a PC. • Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)].
Materials – Troubleshooting Others [ ] is displayed on the screen. • The fan has stopped. Turn off and on the camera. If the fan does not work after turning the camera off and then on again, consult the dealer. • The temperature of the camera will rise if you continue to use the camera with the fan stopped. Do not use over long periods of time. An alarm sounds when the card door is opened. • An alarm may sound when a door is opened while writing to a card.
Materials – Cautions for Use Cautions for Use The Camera Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.). • If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation. • Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely affecting the pictures and/or sound.
Materials – Cautions for Use Keep items away from the magnetic parts (A)/(B)/(C) that are easily influenced by magnetism. The effects of the magnets may cause items like bank cards, commuter cards, and clocks to cease functioning correctly. (A) (B) (C) Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals. • If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be damaged and the surface finish may peel off.
Materials – Cautions for Use When Using in Cold Places or at Low Temperatures • Skin burns may result if you leave the metal parts of the camera in direct contact with the skin for long periods of time at cold places (environments with temperatures at or below 0 oC (32 oF), such as ski resorts or places at high altitude). Use gloves or similar when using it for long periods.
Materials – Cautions for Use Cleaning Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler, and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe the camera with a dry, soft cloth. • When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth, and then with a dry cloth. • Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc.
Materials – Cautions for Use Dirt on the Image Sensor If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the recording conditions, it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on the recorded picture. To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid changing the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a lens when storing the camera. Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
Materials – Cautions for Use Cleaning the Viewfinder If the viewfinder is dirty, then remove the eye cup and clean. While pushing the eye cup lock lever (D), push the eye cup up in the direction of the arrow and remove (E). Blow dirt off the surface of the viewfinder using a commercially available blower, then lightly wipe with a soft, dry cloth. • After cleaning, fit by pushing the eye cup in the direction of the arrow until a click is heard (F). • Be careful not to lose the eye cup.
Materials – Cautions for Use Monitor/Viewfinder • Do not push hard on the monitor. This may cause irregular coloration or malfunction. • Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the monitor/viewfinder screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots, or spots that light constantly (red, blue, or green) on the screen. This is not a malfunction.
Materials – Cautions for Use Lens • When using this lens, take care not to drop, bump, or apply undue force to it. Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to this lens and the digital camera. • Do not aim the lens at the sun or strong light sources. The concentrated light may cause fire or damage. • Images may be affected by dust, dirt, and soiling (water, oil, fingerprints, etc.) on the lens surface.
Materials – Cautions for Use Battery The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery. It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on performance increases as the temperature rises or drops. Always remove the battery after use. • Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, etc., and keep away from metallic objects (clips, etc.) for storage or transport. If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the battery and the contacts are deformed.
Materials – Cautions for Use Charger, AC Adaptor • The charging lights may blink under the influence of static electricity or electromagnetic wave, depending on the charging environment. This phenomenon has no effects on charging. • If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed. Keep the charger 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio. • During usage, the AC adaptor may emit an electrical hum; this is not a malfunction.
Materials – Cautions for Use Personal Information Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images. We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password and Wi-Fi function lock to protect personal information. (Î[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 677) • Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as recording dates and times, and location information.
Materials – Cautions for Use Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely. We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available PC data deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/ transferring the card. You are responsible for handling of data on cards.
Materials – Cautions for Use Tripod • Make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it. • When using a tripod, removal of the battery may not be possible. • Care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the camera, or cause the rating label to come off. • Depending on the type of tripod you are using, the lens may interfere with the tripod head if the lens you are using has a large diameter.
Materials – Cautions for Use Wi-Fi Function Use the camera as a wireless LAN device. When using devices or computer systems that require more reliable security than wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time lengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used. • The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) standards. • Using a Lexar CFexpress Type B card.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery Recording Pictures (When Using the Viewfinder) When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used Card used Number of pictures that can be taken CFexpress card 330 (750) SDXC memory card 360 (850) When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used Card used Number of pictures that can be taken CFexpress card 350 (800) SDXC memory card 380 (900) • The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that res
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor) When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used (A) Using a CFexpress card (B) Using an SDXC memory card [Rec.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery [MOV] [5.7K/60p/420/10-L] (A) 60 30 [5.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery [5.7K/30p/422 HQ] [5.7K/30p/422] [Apple ProRes] [5.7K/25p/422 HQ] [5.7K/25p/422] [5.7K/24p/422 HQ] [5.7K/24p/422] (A) 60 30 60 30 70 35 70 35 70 35 70 35 (B) (A) (B) (A) (B) (A) (B) (A) (B) (A) (B) • Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used (A) Using a CFexpress card (B) Using an SDXC memory card [Rec.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery [MOV] [5.7K/60p/420/10-L] (A) 60 30 [5.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery [5.7K/30p/422 HQ] [5.7K/30p/422] [Apple ProRes] [5.7K/25p/422 HQ] [5.7K/25p/422] [5.7K/24p/422 HQ] [5.7K/24p/422] (A) 70 35 70 35 70 35 70 35 70 35 70 35 (B) (A) (B) (A) (B) (A) (B) (A) (B) (A) (B) • Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery Playback (When Using the Monitor) When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used Card used Playback time CFexpress card 240 minutes SDXC memory card 240 minutes When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used Card used Playback time CFexpress card 250 minutes SDXC memory card 260 minutes • The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time vary depending on the surroundin
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos that can be recorded on a card. • The values listed are approximate.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards Video Recording Time • “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second. • Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded. • [Rec. File Format]: [MP4] [System Frequency]: [59.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards • [Rec. File Format]: [MOV] [System Frequency]: [59.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards [5.8K/30p/420/10-L]/ [5.8K/24p/420/10-L]/ [5.7K/30p/420/10-L]/ [5.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards [System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)] [Rec Quality] CFexpress card capacity 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB [C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]/ [4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]/ [FHD/200p/422/10-I] 21m00s 42m00s 1h25m [C4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]/ [4K/50p/422/10-I(L)] 28m00s 56m00s [C4K/25p/422/10-I]/ [4K/25p/422/10-I]/ [FHD/100p/422/10-I] 42m00s [5.7K/50p/420/10-L]/ [4.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards [FHD/50p/422/10-L]/ [FHD/50p/420/10-L]/ [FHD/50i/422/10-I]/ [FHD/25p/422/10-L]/ [FHD/25p/420/10-L] 2h45m 5h40m 11h20m 1h25m 2h45m 5h25m [FHD/50i/422/10-L] 5h35m 11h15m 22h40m 2h50m 5h35m 10h55m 775
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards [System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)] [Rec Quality] CFexpress card capacity SD card capacity 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 64 GB 128 GB 256 GB [C4K/24p/422/10-I]/ [4K/24p/422/10-I]/ [FHD/120p/422/10-I] 42m00s 1h20m 2h50m 21m00s 42m00s 1h20m [5.7K/48p/420/10-L]/ [4.4K/48p/420/10-L]/ [C4K/120p/420/10-L]/ [4K/120p/420/10-L] 56m00s 1h50m 3h45m 28m00s 56m00s 1h45m [5.8K/24p/420/10-L]/ [5.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards • [Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes] [System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)] [Rec Quality] CFexpress card capacity 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB [5.7K/30p/422 HQ] 8m00s 17m00s 35m00s [5.7K/30p/422] 13m00s 26m00s 53m00s [5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 11m00s 22m00s 44m00s [5.7K/24p/422] 16m00s 33m00s 1h05m [System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)] [Rec Quality] CFexpress card capacity 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB [5.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards • The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time will be shorter depending on the SD card used when recording with [Segmented File Recording] or [Loop Recording (video)]. • Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, number of pictures that can be taken, video recording time vary.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/ Settings Available for Copying : Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings : Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom mode : Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details Menu [Photo]: Default setting [Image Quality] [Photo Style] [ [Metering Mode] [ [Aspect Ratio] ] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [4:3] 3
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying [Min. Shutter Speed] [AUTO] 3 3 3 [Vignetting Comp.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Photo]: Default setting [Flash] [Flash Mode] [ ] 3 3 3 [Firing Mode] [TTL] 3 3 3 [Flash Adjust.] [±0 EV] 3 3 3 [Flash Synchro] [1ST] 3 3 3 [Manual Flash Adjust.] [1/1] 3 3 3 [Auto Exposure Comp.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Photo]: Default setting [Others (Photo)] [Bracketing Type] [OFF] 3 3 3 [More Settings] — 3 3 3 [OFF] 3 3 3 [Operation Mode] [ ] 3 3 3 [E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF] 3 3 [Lens Information] [Lens1] 3 [Burst Shot 1 Setting] [H] 3 3 3 [Burst Shot 2 Setting] [SH75] 3 3 3 [Shutter Type] [MECH.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Video]: Default setting [Image Quality] [Exposure Mode] [P] [Photo Style] [ [Metering Mode] [ [Dynamic Range Boost] [ISO Sensitivity (video)] [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] 3 3 3 3 3 3 ] 3 3 3 [OFF] 3 3 3 [100] 3 3 3 ] [AUTO] 3 3 3 [Synchro Scan] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Flicker Decrease (Video)] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Master Pedestal Level] [0] 3 3 3 [SS/Gain Op
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Video]: Default setting [Image Format] When [System Frequency] is set to [59.94Hz (NTSC)] or [50.00Hz (PAL)]: [MP4] [Rec. File Format] When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]: [MOV] [Image Area of Video] [FULL] 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 When [System Frequency] is set to [59.94Hz (NTSC)]: [FHD/8bit/28M/60p] When [System Frequency] is set to [50.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Video]: Default setting [Focus] [AF Detection Setting] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Detecting Subject] [HUMAN] 3 3 3 [ON] / [OFF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [SET] — 3 3 3 [ON] / [OFF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [SET] — 3 3 3 [Continuous AF] [MODE1] 3 3 3 [AF Assist Light] [ON] 3 3 3 [ON] / [OFF] [ON] 3 3 3 [SET] — 3 3 3 [FAST] 3 3 3 [AF Custom Setting(Video)] [Focus Limiter] [Focus Peaking] [1-Area AF Movin
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Video]: Default setting [Audio] [ON] / [OFF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [SET] — 3 3 3 [Mute Sound Input] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Sound Rec Gain Level] [STANDARD] 3 3 3 [Sound Rec Level Adj.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Video]: Default setting [Others (Video)] [Silent Mode] [Image Stabilizer] [Self Timer Setting] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Operation Mode] [ ] 3 3 3 [E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Boost I.S.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Custom]: [Photo Style Settings] Default setting [Image Quality] [Show/Hide Photo Style] — 3 3 3 [My Photo Style Settings] — 3 3 3 [Reset Photo Style] — [ISO Increments] [1/3 EV] 3 3 3 [Extended ISO] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Multi Metering] [±0EV] 3 3 3 [Center Weighted] [±0EV] 3 3 3 [Spot] [±0EV] 3 3 3 [Highlight Weighted] [±0EV] 3 3 3 [Face Priority In Multi Metering] [ON] 3 3 3 [Co
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Custom]: Default setting [Focus/Shutter] [AFS] [FOCUS] 3 3 3 [AFC] [BALANCE] 3 3 3 [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] [OFF] 3 3 3 [AF/AE Lock Hold] [OFF] 3 3 3 [AF+MF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Focus Ring] [ON] 3 3 3 [AF Mode] [ON] 3 3 3 [Press Joystick] [OFF] 3 3 3 [MF Assist Display] [PIP] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Focus/Shutter Priority] [MF Assist] [MF Guide] [ [Focus Ring Lock] [Show/Hide
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying [Shutter AF] [ON] 3 3 3 [Eye Detection Display] [ON] 3 3 3 [Half-Press Shutter] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Assign REC to Shutter Button] [ON] 3 3 3 [Quick AF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Eye Sensor AF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Looped Focus Frame] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Keep Enlarged Display] [ON] 3 3 3 [PIP Display] [PIP] 3 3 3 [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] *1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area w
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Custom]: [Q.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying [AF ON] button [ ] 3 3 3 Joystick [ ] 3 3 3 [Q] button [ ] 3 3 3 Cursor buttons / [MENU/ SET] button [ ] 3 3 3 Control dial [ ] 3 3 3 [ [ ] 3 3 3 [ ] 3 3 3 Touch screen [ ] 3 3 3 [ ] (Cancel) button / [ ] (Delete) button / Fn button (Fn1) [ ] 3 3 3 [DISP.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying [Setting in REC mode] — 3 3 3 [Setting in PLAY mode] — 3 3 3 [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] [AFTER PRESSING2] 3 3 3 [ISO Displayed Setting] [Front/Rear Dials] [ 3 3 3 [Cursor Buttons (Up/ Down)] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Front/Rear Dials] [ 3 3 3 [Assign Dial (F/SS)] [SET1] 3 3 3 [Rotation (F/SS)] [ 3 3 3 [Control Dial Assignment] [ ] 3 3 3 [Exposure Comp.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Custom]: Default setting [Monitor / Display (Photo)] [Duration Time (photo)] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Playback Operation Priority] [OFF] 3 3 3 [ON] / [OFF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [SET] — 3 3 3 [Histogram] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Photo Grid Line] [OFF] 3 3 3 [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [SET] [M] 3 3 3 [Monitor] [OFF] 3 3 3 [LVF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [LVF Disp. Set] [ ] 3 3 3 [Monitor Disp.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Custom]: Default setting [Monitor / Display (Video)] [Read LUT File] — [LUT Select] [Vlog_709] 3 3 3 [OFF] 3 3 3 [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Monitor] [MODE2] 3 3 3 [HDMI] [AUTO] 3 3 3 [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Monochrome Live View] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Center Marker] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Safety Zone Marker] [OFF] 3 3 3 [ON] / [OFF] [OFF] 3 3 3 [SET] — 3
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Custom]: [HDMI Rec Output] Default setting [IN/OUT] [Info Display] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Down Convert] [AUTO] 3 3 3 [HDMI Recording Control] [OFF] 3 3 3 [Sound Output (HDMI)] [ON] 3 3 3 [Enlarged Live Display] [OFF] 3 3 3 [AUTO2] 3 3 3 [Front Tally Lamp] [H] 3 3 3 [Rear Tally Lamp] [L] 3 3 3 [Fan Mode] [Tally Lamp] Menu [Custom]: Default setting [Lens / Others] [Lens Focus Resume] [O
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Setup]: Default setting [Card/File] [Card Format] [Double Card Slot Function] — [Recording Method] [ [Destination Card Slot] [ 3 3 3 3 [Same As Photo(DCF Standard)] 3 3 [Camera Index] [A] 3 3 [Next Card Number] [001] 3 3 [Select Folder] — [Create a New Folder] — [File Name Setting] [Folder Number Link] 3 3 [Video File Name] [CINE Style File Setting] [Folder / File Settings] [File Number Re
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Setup]: Default setting [Monitor / Display] [Sleep Mode] [5MIN.] 3 3 [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON] 3 3 [5MIN.] 3 3 [Power Save LVF Shooting] — 3 3 [Recording Max Temperature] [STANDARD] 3 3 [Monitor Frame Rate] [60fps] 3 3 [Monitor Settings] / [Viewfinder] — 3 3 [Monitor Backlight] / [LVF Luminance] [AUTO] 3 3 [Sensitivity] [HIGH] 3 3 [LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/MON AUTO] 3 3 [Adjust.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Setup]: Default setting [IN/OUT] [Beep] [Beep Volume] [ ] 3 3 [AF Beep Volume] [ ] 3 3 [AF Beep Tone] [ ] 3 3 [E-Shutter Vol] [ ] 3 3 [E-Shutter Tone] [ ] 3 3 3 [Headphone Volume] [LEVEL3] 3 [Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)] [COMBINED WITH REC] 3 [Wi-Fi] — 3 [Bluetooth] — 3 [USB] [ ] [Select on connection] 3 3 [USB Power Supply] [ON] 3 3 [Output Resolution(Playback)] [AUT
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Setup]: Default setting [Setting] [Save to Custom Mode] — 3 3 [Load Custom Mode] — 3 3 [Limit No.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Setup]: Default setting [Others] [Clock Set] 0:00:00 1/1/2022 [Time Zone] *1 [System Frequency] [59.94Hz (NTSC)] / [50.00Hz (PAL)]*1 [Pixel Refresh] — [Sensor Cleaning] — [Language] *1 [Firmware Version] — [Approved Regulations]*2 — 3 3 3 3 3 *1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [My Menu]: Default setting [Edit My Menu] [Add] — [Sorting] — [Delete] — [Display from My Menu] [OFF] Menu [Playback]: 3 3 3 3 Default setting [Playback Mode] [Playback Mode] [Normal Play] 3 3 [Slide Show] — 3 3 [Rotate Disp.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying Menu [Playback]: Default setting [Add/Delete Info.
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode Menu [Photo]: iA P A S M [Image Quality] [Photo Style] 3 [Metering Mode] 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Aspect Ratio] 3 3 3 3 3 [Picture Quality] 3 3 3 3 3 [Picture Size] 3 3 3 3 3 [Handheld High-Res] 3 3 3 3 [Picture Quality] 3 3 3 3 [Picture Size] 3 3 3 3 [Simul Record Normal Shot] 3 3 3 3 [Shutter Delay] 3 3 3 3 [Motion Blur Processi
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode Menu P A S M [AF Detection Setting] 3 3 3 3 [Detecting Subject] 3 3 3 3 [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Photo]: iA [Focus] [Focus Limiter] 3 [AF Assist Light] [Focus Peaking] [ON] / [OFF] 3 3 3 3 3 [SET] 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 iA P A S M [1-Area AF Moving Speed] Menu [Photo]: [Flash] [Flash Mode] 3 3 3 3 [Firing Mode] 3 3 3 3 3 [Flash Adjust.
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode Menu iA P A S M [Bracketing Type] 3 3 3 3 3 [More Settings] 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Operation Mode] 3 3 3 3 3 [E-Stabilization (Video)] 3 3 3 3 3 [Boost I.S. (Video)] 3 3 3 3 3 [Anamorphic (Video)] 3 3 3 3 3 [Lens Information] 3 3 3 3 3 [Burst Shot 1 Setting] 3 3 3 3 3 [Burst Shot 2 Setting] 3 3 3 3 3 [Shutter Type] 3 3 3 3 3 [Shutter Delay] 3 3 3 3 3 [Ex.
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode Menu [Video]: iA P A S M 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Image Quality] [Exposure Mode] 3 [Photo Style] [Metering Mode] [Dynamic Range Boost] [ISO Sensitivity (video)] 3 [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] 3 [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] 3 [Synchro Scan] 3 [Flicker Decrease (Video)] 3 3 3 3 [Master Pedestal Level] 3 [SS/Gain Operation] 3 [Vignetting Comp.
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode Menu iA P A S M [Rec.
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode Menu iA P A S M [Sound Rec Level Disp.] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Mute Sound Input] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Sound Rec Gain Level] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Sound Rec Level Adj.] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Sound Rec Quality] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Sound Rec Level Limiter] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Wind Noise Canceller] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Wind Cut] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Lens Noise Cut] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Mic Socket] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Special Mic.
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode Menu [Video]: iA P A S M [Others (Video)] [Silent Mode] [Image Stabilizer] [Self Timer Setting] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Operation Mode] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [E-Stabilization (Video)] 3 3 3 3 3 3 [Boost I.S.
Materials – Specifications Specifications The specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement. Digital camera body (DC-GH6): Information for your safety Power source: 9.0 V Power consumption: 4.8 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.8 W (when playing back with the monitor) [When using the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060)] 4.6 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.
Materials – Specifications Image sensor ≥ Image sensor 4/3″ Live MOS sensor, a total of 26,520,000 pixels, primary color filter ≥ Effective number of pixels of the camera 25,210,000 pixels Latitude 13+ stops (when [Dynamic Range Boost] is set to [ON]), 12+ stops (when [Dynamic Range Boost] is set to [OFF]) ([V-Log]) Recording format for still images ≥ File format for still images JPEG (DCF compliant, Exif 2.
Materials – Specifications When the aspect ratio setting is [16:9] [L]: 5776×3248 [M]: 4096×2304 [S]: 2944×1656 High Resolution mode ([XL]): 11552×6496 High Resolution mode ([LL]): 8192×4608 When the aspect ratio setting is [1:1] [L]: 4336×4336 [M]: 3072×3072 [S]: 2208×2208 High Resolution mode ([XL]): 8672×8672 High Resolution mode ([LL]): 6144×6144 ≥ Image quality for pictures Fine / Standard / RAW+Fine / RAW+Standard / RAW Recording format for video ≥ Video format MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.
Materials – Specifications Viewfinder ≥ Type Aspect ratio 4:3, 0.5 inches, approx. 3,680,000 dots, organic EL (OLED) live view viewfinder ≥ Field of view ratio Approx. 100 % ≥ Magnification Approx. 1.52×, Approx. 0.76× (35 mm film camera equivalent), −1.0 m−1 50 mm at infinity, with aspect ratio set to [4:3] ≥ Eye point Approx. 21 mm (at −1.0 m−1) ≥ Diopter adjustment range −4.0 to +3.0 diopter ≥ Eye sensor Yes Monitor ≥ Type Aspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches, approx.
Materials – Specifications Focus ≥ AF type TTL type based on image detection (Contrast AF) ≥ Focus mode AFS / AFC / MF ≥ AF mode Tracking / Full Area AF / Zone (Horizontal/Vertical) / Zone / 1-Area+Supplementary / 1-Area / Pinpoint Focus area selection is possible by touching or with the joystick Exposure control ≥ Light metering system, Light metering mode 1728-zone metering, multi-metering / center-weighted metering / spot metering / highlight-weighted metering ≥ Metering range EV 0 to EV 18 (F2.
Materials – Specifications ≥ ISO sensitivity for video (standard output sensitivity) Normal: [Dynamic Range Boost] [OFF]: AUTO / 50*4 / 100 to 12800 (base sensitivity ISO100) [ON]*5: AUTO / 800 to 12800 (base sensitivity ISO800) [V-Log]: [Dynamic Range Boost] [OFF]: AUTO / 125*4 / 250 to 12800 (base sensitivity ISO250) [ON]*5: AUTO / 2000 to 12800 (base sensitivity ISO2000) [Hybrid Log Gamma]: [Dynamic Range Boost] [OFF]: AUTO / 250 to 12800 (base sensitivity ISO250) [ON]*5: AUTO / 2000 to 12800 (base sens
Materials – Specifications White balance ≥ White balance mode AWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade / Incandescent lights / Flash / Set mode 1, 2, 3, 4 / Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4 Shutter ≥ Type Focal-plane shutter ≥ Shutter speed Pictures: Mechanical shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/8000 of a second Electronic front curtain: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/2000 of a second Electronic shutter: Bulb (max. approx.
Materials – Specifications Burst recording ≥ Mechanical shutter/Electronic front curtain High speed: 14 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 8 frames/second ([AFC]) Medium speed: 6 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 5 frames/second ([AFC]) Low speed: 2 frames/second ≥ Electronic shutter [SH75]: 75 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) [SH60]: 60 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) [SH20]: 20 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) High speed: 14 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 7 frames/second ([AFC]) Medium speed: 6 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 5 f
Materials – Specifications Interface ≥ USB USB Type-C®, SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps (USB 3.2 Gen 2) Supports USB Power Delivery (9.0 V/3.0 A) ≥ HDMI HDMI Type A ≥ [REMOTE] ‰2.5 mm jack ≥ [MIC] ‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack Mic Input (Plug-in Power) / Mic Input / Line Input (Operate the menu to switch between these inputs) Standard input level: −55 dBV (Mic Input) / −10 dBV (Line Input) ≥ Headphones ‰3.
Materials – Specifications External dimensions / Mass (Weight) ≥ External dimensions Approx. 138.4 mm (W)×100.3 mm (H)×99.6 mm (D) (5.45″ (W)×3.95″ (H)×3.92″ (D)) (excluding the projecting parts) ≥ Mass (Weight) Approx. 823 g/1.81 lb (camera body, with battery and one SD memory card) Approx. 739 g/1.
Materials – Specifications Wi-Fi ≥ Compliance standard IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless LAN protocol) ≥ Frequency range used (central frequency) Specifications vary depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased. Refer to the “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual ” (supplied) for details. ≥ Encryption method Wi-Fi compliant WPA™ / WPA2™ / WPA3™ ≥ Access method Infrastructure mode Bluetooth ≥ Compliance standard Bluetooth v5.
Materials – Specifications Interchangeable Lens: H-ES12060 “LEICA DG VARIO-ELMARIT 12-60mm/F2.8-4.0 ASPH./ POWER O.I.S.” ≥ Mount Micro Four Thirds Mount ≥ Focal length f=12 mm to 60 mm (35 mm film camera equivalent: 24 mm to 120 mm) ≥ Lens construction 14 elements in 12 groups (4 aspherical lenses, 2 ED lenses) ≥ Aperture type 9 diaphragm blades/circular aperture diaphragm ≥ Maximum aperture F2.8 (Wide) to F4.
Materials – Specifications ≥ Filter diameter 62 mm ≥ Maximum diameter ‰68.4 mm (2.7″) ≥ Overall length Approx. 86 mm (3.4″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount) ≥ Mass (Weight) Approx. 320 g (0.
Materials – Specifications Interchangeable Lens: H-FS12060 “LUMIX G VARIO 12-60mm/F3.5-5.6 ASPH./POWER O.I.S.” ≥ Mount Micro Four Thirds Mount ≥ Focal length f=12 mm to 60 mm (35 mm film camera equivalent: 24 mm to 120 mm) ≥ Lens construction 11 elements in 9 groups (3 aspherical lenses, 1 ED lens) ≥ Aperture type 7 diaphragm blades/circular aperture diaphragm ≥ Maximum aperture F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele) ≥ Minimum aperture value F22 ≥ Angle of view 84o (Wide) to 20o (Tele) ≥ In focus distance 0.20 m (0.
Materials – Specifications ≥ Filter diameter 58 mm ≥ Maximum diameter ‰66.0 mm (2.6″) ≥ Overall length Approx. 71 mm (2.8″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount) ≥ Mass (Weight) Approx. 210 g (0.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses Trademarks and Licenses • Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of OM Digital Solutions Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the European Union and other countries. • Lexar, the Lexar logo, and all other Lexar trademarks are the property of Longsys Electronics (HK) Co., Ltd. • SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses • USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. • The USB Type-C® Charging Trident Logos are trademarks of USB Implementers Forum, Inc. • The SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps Trident Logo is a registered trademark of USB Implementers Forum, Inc. • QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc., used under license therefrom. • HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses • The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. • The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. • The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Logo is a trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. • “Wi-Fi®” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses • This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a registered trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc. • QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED. • LEICA is a registered trademark of Leica Microsystems IR GmbH. ELMARIT is a registered trademark of Leica Camera AG.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses This product incorporates the following software: (1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation, (2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Corporation, (3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL V2.0), (4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version 2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or (5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.
Firmware Update ≥ Firmware Ver. 2.0: F-3 ≥ Firmware Ver. 2.2: F-23 A firmware update has been made available to improve camera capabilities and to add functionality. The subsequent sections describe functions that have been added or modified. • To check the firmware version of the camera, select [Firmware Version] in the [Setup] ([Others]) menu. • For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware, visit the following support site: https://panasonic.
Firmware Update About Applications/Software When you have updated the firmware for the camera, use the latest version of the application for your smartphone or the software for your PC. “LUMIX Sync” • Install or update the application on your smartphone. “LUMIX Tether” • Check the following site and then download and install the software: https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.
Firmware Ver. 2.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data Support for Output of RAW Video Data ≥ Outputting RAW Video Data via HDMI: F-6 ≥ Notes When Outputting RAW Video Data: F-11 12-bit RAW Video Data with a maximum resolution of 5.8K can now be output via HDMI to a compatible external recorder. 5.8K(4:3) / FULL 29.97p/25.00p/23.98p 5.7K(17:9) / FULL 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/23.98p C4K(17:9) / PIXEL/PIXEL 119.88p/100.00p/59.94p/50.00p/ 29.97p/25.00p/23.98p 4.4K(4:3) / FULL 59.94p/50.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data • You will need compatible software to edit the RAW Video Data recorded with the external recorder. To change the coloring according to V-Log/V-Gamut when editing, download a LUT (Look-Up Table) from the support site below and load it into the software. • Visit the following site to download LUT data or view the latest support information: https://panasonic.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data Outputting RAW Video Data via HDMI [HDMI RAW Data Output] has been added to the [Video] menu. The image quality for the output images is set in [Rec Quality]. Getting started: 1 Turn off the camera and the external recorder. 2 Connect the camera and the external recorder with a commercially available HDMI cable. • Use an Ultra High Speed HDMI cable (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) long). 3 Turn on the camera and the external recorder.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data 3 Select a recording quality. 4 Set the HDMI input on the external recorder. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [Rec Quality] • When the connection is complete, images will be displayed on the screen of the external recorder. There are differences from normal HDMI output operation. • [HDMI Rec Output] in the [Custom] ([IN/OUT]) menu. – [Info Display] is not available. You cannot output the camera information display to an external recorder connected by HDMI.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data [Rec Quality] (When [HDMI RAW Data Output] is selected) [Rec Quality] [5.8K/30p/4:3] [System [Image Area Frequency] of Video] *1, 2 Resolution Frame rate [FULL] 5760×4320 29.97p [5.8K/24p/4:3]*2 [FULL] 5760×4320 23.98p [5.7K/60p/17:9]*1 [FULL] 5728×3024 59.94p [5.7K/30p/17:9] [FULL] 5728×3024 29.97p [5.7K/24p/17:9] [FULL] 5728×3024 23.98p [FULL] 4352×3264 59.94p [C4K/120p/17:9]*1 [PIXEL/PIXEL] 4096×2160 119.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data • Bit value: 12-bit • Audio format: LPCM (4ch) – When the XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) is connected, if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], 4-channel audio can be recorded. – Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks of the video. • [Image Area of Video] is fixed to the image area according to the [Rec Quality] setting.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data Notes on displayed images • The images displayed on the camera do not affect the RAW Video Data that is output. • The images displayed on the external recorder are images that suit the external recorder specifications. This means that there may be differences between the images displayed on the camera and the images displayed on the external recorder. • The monitor/viewfinder of the camera shows images with the angle of view of the RAW Video Data.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data Notes When Outputting RAW Video Data Operation is as follows when outputting RAW Video Data: • The lower limit of available ISO sensitivity is [250] (when [Extended ISO] is set: [125]). • When the following function is being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is restricted.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added [Apple ProRes] recording qualities have been added. Accordingly, the default settings for [Apple ProRes] recording qualities have been changed. Additional recording qualities can also be used in the [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes. • [Apple ProRes] video with a resolution of 4K or more cannot be recorded to an SD card. Use a CFexpress card.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added [Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes] • Audio format: LPCM (4ch) – Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks of the video. (A) Recording frame rate (B) Bit rate (C) Video compression format (422 HQ: Apple ProRes 422 HQ, 422: Apple ProRes 422) [System Frequency]: [59.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added [System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)] [Rec Quality] [Image Area of Video] Resolution Aspect ratio (A) FULL (B) (C) [C4K/50p/422 HQ] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 50.00p [C4K/50p/422] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 1.6 Gbps 422 HQ 1.1 Gbps [C4K/25p/422 HQ] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 811 Mbps 422 HQ 422 [C4K/25p/422] 3 3 4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 541 Mbps [FHD/50p/422 HQ] 3 3 1920×1080 16:9 50.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added File Division A new file will be created to continue recording if the continuous recording time or the file size exceeds the following conditions. [Rec.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added Available Recording Time for the Battery (When Using the Monitor) Listed below are the time lengths available for recording that can be taken when the supplied battery is being used. • Using a Lexar CFexpress Type B card. • Using a Panasonic SDXC memory card. • The values listed are approximate.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used (A) Using a CFexpress card (B) Using an SDXC memory card [Rec.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used (A) Using a CFexpress card (B) Using an SDXC memory card [Rec.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added Video Recording Time for Cards Listed below are the time lengths of videos that can be recorded on a card. • Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded. • The values listed are approximate. • [Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes] • “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second. [System Frequency]: [59.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – [Apple ProRes] Recording Qualities Have Been Added [System Frequency]: [50.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Button Operations Have Been Added for AF Area Setting Button Operations Have Been Added for AF Area Setting When [AF Detection Setting] is set to [OFF] in the [ ] AF mode, it is now possible to set the [ ] AF area to any position with button operations. ≥ Button operations 1 Press [ 2 Select [ 3 Press 3421 to move the AF area, and then press • Press ] to display the AF mode selection screen. ] and then press 4. again to return to [ ]. F-21 to confirm.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Added Menus Added Menus Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
Firmware Ver. 2.
Firmware Ver. 2.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) Connecting the External SSD Be sure to follow the below steps when connecting and removing the external SSD. If you do not perform the steps as shown, the external SSD may not be recognized or the external SSD or recording data may be corrupted. 1 2 Set [USB-SSD] to [ON]. ≥ ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [USB-SSD] ¨ [ON] Connect the camera and external SSD with the USB connection cable. • Use the USB connection cable supplied with the external SSD.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) Removing the External SSD 1 Set [USB-SSD] to [OFF]. 2 Confirm that the USB-SSD icon on the screen changes to the card icon, then • ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [USB-SSD] ¨ [OFF] unplug the USB connection cable from the camera. • It may take a while for the external SSD to be recognized. • When [USB-SSD] is set to [ON], you cannot use a card even if a card has been inserted. To use a card, set [USB-SSD] to [OFF].
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) Formatting the External SSD Format the external SSD with this camera before use. ¨[ ]¨[ ] ¨ [USB-SSD Format] • When an external SSD is formatted, all of the data stored in the external SSD is erased and cannot be restored. Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the external SSD. • Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting. • Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) Notes About External SSDs • An external SSD cannot be used when the optional DMW-BLF19 battery is being used. • When [USB-SSD] is set to [ON], the following functions are not available: – Recording to cards, playing back pictures/videos recorded to cards – [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of 60.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) • When the temperature of the camera rises when recording over long periods to an external SSD, for example, [ ] appears blinking on the screen. If you continue to use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot be used is displayed on the screen and recording and HDMI output will be stopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the message indicating that the camera can be used again.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time lengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used. • The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) standards. • Using a Samsung external SSD. • The values listed are approximate.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor) When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used [Rec.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) [5.7K/60p/420/10-L] [5.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) [Apple ProRes] [5.7K/30p/422 HQ] 50 25 [5.7K/30p/422] 50 25 [5.7K/25p/422 HQ] 60 30 [5.7K/25p/422] 60 30 [5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 60 30 [5.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used [Rec.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) [5.7K/60p/420/10-L] [5.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) [Apple ProRes] [5.7K/30p/422 HQ] 60 30 [5.7K/30p/422] 60 30 [5.7K/25p/422 HQ] 60 30 [5.7K/25p/422] 60 30 [5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 60 30 [5.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) Playback (When Using the Monitor) When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used Playback time 180 minutes When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used Playback time 180 minutes • The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time vary depending on the surrounding environment and the usage conditions. For example, these will reduce in the following case: – In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time When Using an External SSD Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos that can be recorded on an external SSD. • The values listed are approximate. Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken • [Aspect Ratio]: [4:3]; [Picture Quality]: [FINE] [Picture Size] External SSD capacity 1 TB 2 TB 70630 141290 [M] (12.5M) 119200 238420 [S] (6.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) Video Recording Time • “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second. • Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded. • [Rec. File Format]: [MP4] [System Frequency]: [59.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) • [Rec. File Format]: [MOV] [System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)] [Rec Quality] External SSD capacity 1 TB 2 TB [C4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]/ [C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]/ [4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]/ [4K/48p/422/10-I(H)] 2h45m 5h30m [C4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]/ [C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]/ [4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]/ [4K/48p/422/10-I(L)] 3h40m 7h20m [C4K/30p/422/10-I]/ [C4K/24p/422/10-I]/ [4K/30p/422/10-I]/ [4K/24p/422/10-I] 5h30m 11h05m [5.7K/60p/420/10-L]/ [5.
Firmware Ver. 2.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) [System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)] [Rec Quality] External SSD capacity 1 TB 2 TB [C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]/ [4K/50p/422/10-I(H)] 2h45m 5h30m [C4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]/ [4K/50p/422/10-I(L)] 3h40m 7h20m [C4K/25p/422/10-I]/ [4K/25p/422/10-I] 5h30m 11h05m [5.7K/50p/420/10-L]/ [4.4K/50p/420/10-L] 7h20m 14h45m [5.8K/25p/420/10-L]/ [5.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) [System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)] [Rec Quality] External SSD capacity 1 TB 2 TB [C4K/24p/422/10-I]/ [4K/24p/422/10-I] 5h30m 11h05m [5.7K/48p/420/10-L]/ [4.4K/48p/420/10-L] 7h20m 14h45m [5.8K/24p/420/10-L]/ [5.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) • [Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes] [System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)] [Rec Quality] External SSD capacity 1 TB 2 TB [5.7K/30p/422 HQ] 1h05m 2h15m [5.7K/30p/422] 1h40m 3h30m [5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 1h25m 2h55m [5.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) [System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)] [Rec Quality] External SSD capacity 1 TB 2 TB [5.7K/25p/422 HQ] 1h20m 2h45m [5.7K/25p/422] 2h05m 4h10m [C4K/50p/422 HQ] 1h20m 2h40m [C4K/50p/422] 2h00m 4h05m [C4K/25p/422 HQ] 2h40m 5h25m [C4K/25p/422] 4h05m 8h10m [FHD/50p/422 HQ] 5h50m 11h40m [FHD/50p/422] 8h45m 17h35m [FHD/25p/422 HQ] 11h40m 23h30m [FHD/25p/422] 17h35m 35h15m [System Frequency]: [24.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) • Depending on the recording conditions and the type of external SSD, the number of pictures that can be taken and video recording time vary. • [9999+] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining number of pictures that can be taken is 10000 or more. • [99h59m] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining video recording time is 100 hours or more. • The continuous recordable time for videos is displayed on the screen.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Support for External USB Drive (SSD) USB Port Specifications (Output) ≥ USB USB Type-C®, SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps (USB 3.2 Gen 2) Output: DC 5 V, 900 mA Precautions When Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging After removing an external SSD, when charging the battery in the camera, make sure that the charging light of the camera lights red. If the charging light does not light, reconnect the USB connection cable while the camera is turned off.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Improvements to Limitations on RAW Video Data Output Improvements to Limitations on RAW Video Data Output It is now possible to use ISO sensitivities between [2000] and [12800] when [Dynamic Range Boost] is set to [ON].
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Added Menus Added Menus Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
